Agenda packet — Gardena City Council, November 8, 2022 (part 3 of 5)

1. 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness.

2.02 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED (FRT) MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

TP - 87

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Lumber: Kiln-dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Plywood: Kiln-dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber or plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.
a. If acceptable with Authorities having Jurisdiction, markings may be omitted if certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency are submitted.

F. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

G. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Equipment backing panels, interior exposure - Architectural work.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide the following miscellaneous lumber where indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction. B. Blocking - Architectural work:

1. General:
a. Where used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
b. Where not used for attachment of other construction, Stud, No. 3, Standard, or Utility grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

2. Dimension Lumber:
a. Species: Any of following:
1) WCLIB; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood. 2) WWPA; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood.

TP - 88

b. Provide wood-preservative-treated (WPT) lumber where indicated.

3. Plywood: Limit use only for attaching other construction such as fixtures, accessories, casework, and other materials.
a. DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Grade C-D Plugged or better.
b. Nominal Thickness:
1) Not less than 1/2-inch unless indicated otherwise.
2) As indicated on Drawings.
3) Not less than 3/4-inch where used to support
railings, handrails, grab bars, seating, and similar conditions. C.

Blocking - Utility work:

2. Dimension Lumber:
a. Species: Any of following:
1) WCLIB; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood. 2) WWPA; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood. b. Provide wood-preservative-treated (WPT) lumber where indicated.

TP - 89

1. General: Where used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2. Dimension Lumber:
a. Species: Any of following:
1) WCLIB; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood. 2) WWPA; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood.

3. Board Lumber:
a. Species: Any of following:
1) WCLIB; Hem-fir, Hem-fir (north), Spruce-pine-fir (south), Spruce- pine-fir, or other western woods.
2) WWPA; Hem-fir, Hem-fir (north), Spruce-pine-fir (south), Spruce- pine-fir, or other western woods.

4. Provide wood-preservative-treated (WPT) lumber where indicated.

E. Nailers - Utility work:

1. General: Where used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2. Dimension Lumber:
a. Species: Any of following:
1) WCLIB; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood. 2) WWPA; Hem-fir, Spruce-pine-fir (south), or other western wood.

4. Provide wood-preservative-treated (WPT) lumber where indicated.

2.04 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels, Interior Exposure - Architectural Work:

TP - 90

1. Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Grade A-C.
a. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4-inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
b. Provide fire-retardant-treated (FRT) plywood where indicated.

2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Provide fasteners either with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel for the following work:
a. Carpentry exposed to weather.
b. Carpentry in areas of high relative humidity.
c. Interior carpentry pressure-preservative treated (WPT). d. Carpentry fire-resistive-treated (FRT).

2. Provide only Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for the following work:
a. Exterior carpentry pressure-
preservative treated (WPT).
b. Carpentry is in contact with ground. B.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: Length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened and complying with the following for metal thickness fastened to:

1. ASTM C 1002 for following metal thicknesses:
a. 18 mil (25 gage).
b. 27 mil (22 gage).
c. 30 mil (20 gage drywall).

2. ASTM C 954 for following metal thicknesses:
a. 33 mil (20 gage structural).
b. 43 mil (18 gage).
c. 54 mil (16 gage).
d. 68 mil (14 gage).

2.06 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

TP - 91

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.

2. KC Metals Products, Inc.

3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.

4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

5. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Gluing Rough Carpentry to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Separator Sheeting: Flexible flashing composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high- density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

1. Do not use butyl rubber sheeting over substrates containing ashpaltic compounds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

TP - 92

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

G. Fastening to Wood: Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

H. Fastening to Metal: Use screw type fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Do not countersink screw heads unless otherwise indicated.

I. Bolt and Nut Fastening: Where indicated, bolt and nut fasten carpentry work. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 WOOD BLOCKING INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.

3.03 WOOD NAILERS INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.

3.04 PLYWOOD BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

TP - 93

A. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

B. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

C. Fasten panels to studs to support applied loading.

1. Screw to metal stud wall framing not less than 12 inches o.c. vertically at each stud.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 06 10 53

TP - 94

SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate- faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 06 61 19.13 "Quartz Agglomerate Countertops."

1.03 REFERENCES A.

Acronyms:

1. AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards and its joint adoptees and publishers including:
a. WI - Woodwork Institute.

B. Definitions:

1. Exposed Surfaces: (See AWS for detailed inclusions and exclusions.) a. Exterior surfaces exposed to view.
b. Interior surfaces exposed to view in open casework or behind transparent doors.

2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Interior surfaces only exposed to view when doors or drawers are opened. (See AWS for detailed inclusions and exclusions.)

TP - 95

3. Concealed surfaces: Exterior or interior surfaces that are covered or not normally exposed to view. (See AWS for detailed inclusions and exclusions.)

1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. C.

Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Plastic laminates.

2. PVC edge material.

3. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material.

2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material.

3. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.

4. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim.

5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

TP - 96

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.

2. Thermoset decorative panels.

3. High-pressure decorative laminate.

4. Adhesives.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications:

1. Fabrication shop and installer that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate and install products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Fabrication shop and installer need not be the same unless indicated otherwise below.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

TP - 97

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS,

GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.

Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

2.02 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A.

Grade: Premium .

B. Type of Construction: Type A - Frameless.

C. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:
a. Product indicated on Drawings.
b. Or comparable product by one of the following:
1) Abet Laminati, Inc.
2) Formica Corporation.
3) Lamin-Art, Inc.

TP - 98

4) Panolam Industries International, Inc.
5) Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark
International, Inc. E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL.

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.

4. Edges: Grade VGS.

5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels . F.

Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS Thermoset decorative panels.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.
c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Hardwood plywood.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations as indicated on Drawing's Finish Legend.

2.03 WOOD MATERIALS

TP - 99

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products:

1. Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

2.04 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, soft self-closing.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; DP3B/2 - 4 inch long with 2 inch profile tab pull.

D. Grommets:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; MBG1/A - 2- 3/8" diameter metal brush desk grommet with removable cap. E. Shelf Rests:

BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc- plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

TP - 100

5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 incheswide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: , kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate:

1. For the following uses:
a. General Use: Unpigmented contact cement, contact cement, PVA, or resorcinol.

2. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Provide locks on all drawers and cabinets, unless otherwise noted.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as

TP - 101

necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

TP - 102

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. using following fastener types:
a. Wood Framing, Blocking or Hanging Strips: No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood. b. Metal Backing or Framing Behind Wall Finish:
1) No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal
screws. 2) Toggle bolts.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION 06 41 16

TP - 103

SECTION 06 61 19.13 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Quartz agglomerate countertops.

2. Quartz agglomerate backsplashes.

3. Quartz agglomerate end splashes.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints.

2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

2. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

TP - 104

A. Maintenance Data: For quartz agglomerate countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Cambria.
b. Cosentino USA.
c. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company (Corian)
d. LG Chemical, Ltd.
e. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.

TP - 105

f. Technistone USA, Inc.

2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

B. Plywood Subtop: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.02 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom. B.

Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top and bottom.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corners.

3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: Thickness as indicated n Drawing's Finish Legend.

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated.

1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Joint Type: Bonded, 1/32 inch or less in width with Manufacturer's recommended joint adhesive.

3. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

TP - 106

a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.
b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.
c. Provide 3/4-inch full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch into fixture opening.

2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive quartz agglomerate countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Fasten subtops to support framing by screwing through subtops into framing material.

Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

TP - 107

E. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

F. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

G. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 06 61 19.13

TP- 108

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver with counterflashing.

2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
a. Base flashing.
b. Counterflashing.
c. Flashing receivers.
d. Cold pipe roof-penetration flashing.
e. Hot pipe roof-penetration flashing.

4. Formed equipment support flashing.

5. Formed overhead-piping safety pans.

6. Underlayment Materials:
a. Felt.
b. Synthetic underlyament.
c. Self-Adhering, high-temperature sheet.
d. Slip sheet.

7. Miscellaneous materials for sheet metal flashing and trim. B.

Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.03 COORDINATION

TP- 109

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.

8. Include details of edge conditions, including the following and others as applicable:
a. Counter-flashings.

9. Include details of special conditions.

10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

11. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

TP- 110

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface Texture:

TP- 111

a. Smooth, flat.

2. Surface Finish or Coating:
a. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing alloy on both sides, forming aluminum sheet with reflective luster.
b. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat metal with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
c. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I,

0.018 mm or thicker.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Surface Texture:
a. Smooth, flat.

2. Surface Finish or Coating:
a. Coil-Coated Paint Finishes: Metallic-coated steel sheet pre-painted by coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1) Exposed Surface Finish:
a) Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
b) Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
c) Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat.
2) Exposed Surface Color: As indicated on drawings or to match existing.
3) Concealed Surface Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of

0.5 mil.

TP- 112

2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene, synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over 220 deg F; and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I and Type II felts.

C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip- resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.

D. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft.minimum.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

TP- 113

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

2.05 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as flashing.

B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick.

2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

3. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.

4. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.

5. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.

2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,

TP- 114

geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Shop fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams and seal as follows:

1. Aluminum Sheet with Alclad Finish: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2. Aluminum Sheet with Factory Prime (Painted) Coating: Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

3. Aluminum Sheet with Clear Anodic Finish: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:

TP- 115

2.07 With Coil-Coated Painted Finish: Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.

Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

B. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

D. Cold Pipe Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

E. Hot Pipe Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.

B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

TP- 116

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

D. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, [over underlayment] [directly on substrate] <Insert requirement> before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

TP- 117

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of flashing and trim fabricated from the following sheet metal(s) with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
a. Aluminum sheet with alclad finish.
b. Aluminum sheet with factory prime (painted) coating
c. Aluminum sheet with clear anodic finish.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install following underlayment(s). a. Felt covered by slip sheet.
b. Synthetic underlayment.
c. Self-Adhering, high-temperature sheet. C. Expansion
Provisions:

1. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
a. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. b. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. Apply sealant tape concealed in joint.

2. Conceal where possible in exposed work.

3. Locate to minimize possibility of leakage.

4. Cover and seal anchors as required for a tight installation.

D. Fasteners:

1. Size: Use fastener sizes that:

TP- 118

a. Penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
b. Penetrate other substrates not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

2. Conceal where possible in exposed work.

3. Locate to minimize possibility of leakage.

4. Cover and seal as required for a tight installation. E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
F. Rivets:

1. Where necessary for strength, rivet field joints if riveting is permitted for shop fabricated joints.

2. Do not rivet soldered joints unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rivets heads exposed to view must closely match color of sheet metal finish.

3.04 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.

Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

TP- 119

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.05 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.

3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean the following exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

1. Aluminum sheet with alclad finish.

2. Aluminum sheet with clear anodic finish. B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 07 62 00

TP - 120

SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Metal roof curbs.

2. Metal equipment supports.

3. Pipe supports.

4. Duct supports.

5. Curb-mounted pipe portals.

6. Flashing pipe portals.

7. Preformed flashing sleeves. B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches.

2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with the following to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1. Interfacing and adjoining construction.

2. Roofing membrane and base flashing.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.

TP - 121

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.

4. Required clearances.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

TP - 122

B. Gravity Loads:

1. Roof Curbs: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2. Equipment Supports: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

C. Wind and Seismic Design Criteria: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

D. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2.02 METAL ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with construction indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. AES Industries, Inc.
b. Adaptable Air Products.
c. Air Balance, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
d. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc.
e. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
f. LM Curbs.
g. Louvers & Dampers; a division of Mestek, Inc.
h. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. i. Plenums Incorporated.
j. Roof Curb Systems Inc.
k. Roof Products and Systems (RPS); a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. l. Roof Products, Inc.
m. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. D. Metal Material:

1. Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.

E. Construction:

1. Corner Joints: Welded or mechanically fastened and sealed.

TP - 123

2. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard with integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom, compatible with roofing system, and as follows:
a. At single ply membrane roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides, no cant at deck-mounting flange.
b. At built-up non-insulated roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides with integral cant at deck-mounting flange.
c. At built-up insulated roofs, form curbs with stepped metal sides with no cant at deck-mounting flange and with integral metal cant at level raised the thickness of roof insulation.
d. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides, and form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated.

4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck- mounting flange or by use of leveler frame.

5. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

6. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick glass-fiber board insulation complying with ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of

4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

7. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.

8. Nailer:
a. Factory-installed wood nailer along top flange of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.
b. Material: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

9. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

10. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4 inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

11. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as curb.

2.03 METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Rail-type metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural supports, including equipment loads and other

TP - 124

construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between structural supports; capable of meeting performance requirements; with construction indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. AES Industries, Inc.
b. Adaptable Air Products.
c. Air Balance, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
d. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc.
e. Curbs Plus, Inc.
f. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
g. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
h. KCC Interynational Inc.
i. LM Curbs.
j. Louvers & Dampers; a division of Mestek, Inc.
k. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. l. Pate Company (The).
m. Plenums Incorporated.
n. Roof Curb Systems Inc.
o. Roof Products and Systems (RPS); a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. p. Roof Products, Inc.
q. Thybar Corporation.
r. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. D. Metal Material:

1. Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.

E. Construction:

1. Corner Joints: Welded or mechanically fastened and sealed.

TP - 125

c. At built-up insulated roofs, form curbs with stepped metal sides with no cant at structure-mounting flange and with integral metal cant at level raised the thickness of roof insulation.
d. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides, and form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

3. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.

5. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick glass-fiber board insulation complying with ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of

4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

6. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.

7. Nailer:
a. Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide on top flange of equipment supports, continuous around support perimeter. b. Material: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

8. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

9. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4 inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

10. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support.

2.04 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Fixed-Height Cradle-Type Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand accommodating up to 1-1/2 inch diameter pipe or conduit; with provision for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as recommended for penetration-free installation over roof membrane type; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

TP - 126

a. Miro Industries.
b. Pate Company (The).
c. PHP Systems/Design.
d. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2.05 DUCT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Extruded-aluminum, urethane-insulated supports, 2 inches in diameter; with manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck.

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

2.06 CURB-MOUNTED PIPE PORTALS
A. Description: Insulated roof-curb units with construction indicated and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom; with weathertight curb cover with single or multiple collared openings and pressure-sealed conically shaped EPDM protective rubber caps sized for piping indicated, with stainless-steel snaplock swivel clamps.

B. Construction:

1. Corner Joints: Welded or mechanically fastened and sealed.

2. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard with integrally formed structure-mounting flange at perimeter bottom, compatible with roofing system, and as follows:
a. At single ply membrane roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides, no cant at structure-mounting flange.
b. At built-up non-insulated roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides with integral cant at structure-mounting flange.
c. At built-up insulated roofs, form curbs with stepped metal sides with no cant at structure-mounting flange and with integral metal cant at level raised the thickness of roof insulation.
d. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form curbs with straight metal sides, and form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

TP - 127

2.07 FLASHING PIPE PORTALS
A. Description: Formed aluminum membrane-mounting flashing flange and sleeve with collared opening and pressure-sealed conically shaped EPDM protective rubber cap sized for piping indicated, with stainless-steel snaplock swivel clamps.

2.08 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES
A. Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled, with integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted metal collar.

2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

3. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
b. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. c. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

3. Height: 13 inches.

4. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

2.09 METAL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:

TP - 128

1. Provide either of following unless indicated otherwise:
a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation and mill phosphatized for field painting where indicated.
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated.

2. Finish for Factory Painted Metal:
a. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1) Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight. 2) Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of wash coat and prime coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
b. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished. C.

Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Underlayment:

1. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-

TP - 129

modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

D. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

TP - 130

A. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of setting bed material where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
a. On non-asphaltic roofing use elastomeric sealant, butyl sealant, or other sealant material recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.

D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.

E. Pipe Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install supports and attachments as required to properly support piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Space supports for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

F. Pipe Portal Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written instructions; flash sleeve flange to surrounding roof membrane according to roof membrane manufacturer's instructions.

G. Preformed Flashing-Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written instructions; flash sleeve flange to surrounding roof membrane according to roof membrane manufacturer's instructions.

TP - 131

H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.03 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 07 72 00

TP - 132

SECTION 07 73 00 - ROOFTOP SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber pipe and conduit supports for mechanical piping, plumbing piping, and electrical conduit systems.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A653 G90 SS Gr. 33 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dipped Process
B. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

C. ASTM C531 – Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfaces, and Polymer Concretes D. ASTM C642 – Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete
E. ASTM D412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension
F. ASTM D395 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property – Compression Set G. ASTM D573 – Test Method for Rubber – Deterioration in an Air Oven H. ASTM D746 – Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
I. ASTM D2240 – Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness J. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

TP - 133

1.05 Rubber / steel pipe supports shall be manufactured under a strict quality control program assuring quality product delivered to the jobsite. Pipe supports that are damaged shall not be installed.

A. Workmanship: All pipe and conduit supports to be installed by a qualified piping and/or electrical contractor and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. All work shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes and laws having jurisdiction.

2. All work shall conform to accepted industry and trade standards for pipe and conduit support installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe support systems shall be Dura-Blok design as supplied by Cooper B-Line, Inc. or approved equal.

B. MATERIALS
C. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a uniform load capacity of 500 pounds per linear foot of support*. In addition, each base to have a reflective red stripe.(*See 3.01(C))
D. Dimensions: Minimum 6-inches wide by height as required by length as required.

E. Steel frame: Steel, 14ga strut galvanized per ASTM A653 or 12ga strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge series.

F. Attaching hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.

G. Any products claiming to be a similar, like, or equal must demonstrate (meet or exceed) the same physical and performance characteristics as specified below:

1. Density: 0.52 oz/cu (ASTM C642)

2. Durometer Hardness: 67.2A ± 1 (ASTM D2240)

3. Tensile Strength: 231 psi minimum (ASTM D412)

4. Compression Deformation: 5% at 70psi and 72ºF (ASTM D395)

5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 8 x 10 -6 in/in/ºF (min) (ASTM C531)

6. Weathering: 70 hours at 120ºF (ASTM D573)

TP - 134

a. Hardness retained: 100% (±5%)
b. Compressive strength: 100% (±5%)
c. Tensile strength: 100% (±5%)
d. Elongation retained: 100% (±5%)

2.02 TYPE OF ROOFTOP SUPPORTS
A. Rubber block supports – Dura-Blok model #DBP or #DMB base dimensions: 6-inch wide by 4-inch tall by length as required. Accessories are fastened directly into rubber material with weather resistant type 12 lag screws.

B. Continuous block channel supports – Dura-Blok DB-Series or DB6-Series: Dimensions 6-inch wide by height as required by length as required. Assembly has 1” gaps between blocks for free flow of water. Standard strut accessories can be used for attachment.

C. Bridge channel supports – Dura-Blok DB10-Series; Dimensions 6-inch wide by 55/8- inch tall by length as required. Standard strut accessories can be used for attachment.

D. Extendible height support – Dura-Blok model DBE 10-8, 12, or 161, height to suit application: 8-inch, 12-inch or 16-inch (200 pound maximum load). Base to be 9.6 inches in length or otherwise specified sizes available. Heavier loads, may require CLDP load distribution plate.

E. Roller supports– Dura-Blok DBR10 Series & DBR Series: DBR10 Series is sized for pipe up to 3-1/2 inches, with vertical adjustment up to 12 inches.DBR Series is sized for 2 to 20-inch pipe sizes.

F. Elevated single pipe supports– Dura-Blok DBM Series: Copper or Steel pipe sizes 1/2 to 2-inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Always consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If necessary, a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) may be installed under rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection.

C. Gas pipe spacing subject to local gas authorities.

TP - 135

D. Use properly sized clamps to suit pipe and conduit sizes.

END OF SECTION 07 72 00

TP - 136

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. The following joint sealant compositions:
a. Silicone joint sealants.
b. Urethane joint sealants.
c. Silyl-terminated polyether joint sealants.
d. Butyl joint sealants.
e. Latex joint sealants.

2. Joint sealant backings:
a. Cylindrical backings.
b. Bond-breaker tape.

3. Miscellaneous materials including:
a. Primers.
b. Cleaners.
c. Masking tape.

B. Joint Sealant Schedule: Select joint sealant compositions from the following application schedules for each severity of use, substrate, and joint type. Where more than one sealant composition is listed, select the one best suited for the conditions indicated or encountered.

1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces, subject to differential movement, including ceilings, soffits and other overhead surfaces. a. Exposed interior surfaces including ceilings, soffits, walls, and partitions:
1) Control joints: JS-001, JS-002, JS-011, JS-012, JS-106, JS-117, JS- 122, JS-202, JS-206, JS-207; except as follows:

TP - 137

a) Do not use silicone sealants and joints receiving field applied paint coatings.
2) Expansion joints: JS-001, JS-011, JS-106, JS-206; except as follows:
a) Do not use silicone sealants at joints receiving field applied paint coatings.

2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement; dry locations only.
a. Joints in ceilings, soffits, and other overhead surfaces: JS-401, except do not use silicone containing sealant for joints receiving field applied paint coatings.
b. Joints between interior wall surfaces and perimeter of door and opening frames, windows, and elevator entrances. JS-401, except do not use silicone containing sealant for joints receiving field applied paint coatings.

3. Concealed mastics.
a. Metal thresholds: JS-351
b. Metal sill plates: JS-351. C.

Related Requirements:

1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. ASHRAE - Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

TP - 138

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by [manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency] [a qualified testing agency].

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.07 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

TP - 139

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively.

Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer[ or are below 40 deg F].

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

TP - 140

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. ASHRAE - VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less.

2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less.

3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of [775] <Insert value> g/L or less.

C. ASHRAE - Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

2.02 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. JS-001 - Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

TP - 141

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2700 SilPruf LM .
b. Sika Corporation U.S.; [Sikasil WS-290] [Sikasil WS-290 FPS]. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

B. JS-002 - Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS2000 SilPruf.
c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil 265 LTS.
d. Pecora Corporation; PCS.
e. Sika Corporation U.S.; [Sikasil WS-295] [Sikasil WS-295 FPS]. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

C. JS-011 - Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; NS.
b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; [Bondaflex Sil 728 NS].
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

D. JS-012 - Silicone, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

TP - 142

b. Soudal USA; RTV 50.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.03 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. JS-106 - Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex 15LM.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

B. JS-117 - Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

C. JS-122 - Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.04 SILYL-TERMINATED POLYETHER (STPE) JOINT SEALANTS
A. JS-202 - STPE, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

TP - 143

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS7000.
b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL Tru-White.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede 100.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

B. JS-206 - STPE, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100, Uses T and NT.

C. JS-207 - STPE, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

2.05 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. JS-351 - Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300.
b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.06 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

TP - 144

A. JS-401 - Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac. b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; [Bondaflex 600] [Bondaflex Sil-A 700].
c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); [850A] [950A] [PowerHouse]. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.07 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.
b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. c. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.
b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. c. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance, and type indicated below except where approved otherwise in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated:

1. Location, Exterior:
a. Exposure, Wet:

TP - 145

1) Position, Vertical:
a) Type C (closed cell material with a surface skin).
b) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).
2) Position, Horizontal:
a) Type C (closed cell material with a surface skin).
b) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).
b. Exposure, Dry:
1) Position, Vertical: Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin). 2) Position, Horizontal: Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).

2. Location, Interior:
a. Exposure, Wet:
1) Position, Vertical:
a) Type C (closed cell material with a surface skin).
b) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).
2) Position, Horizontal:
a) Type C (closed cell material with a surface skin).
b) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).
b. Exposure, Dry:
1) Position, Vertical:
a) Type O (open-cell material)
b) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).
2) Position, Horizontal: Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin).

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

TP - 146

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. <Insert other porous joint substrate>.

3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

TP - 147

a. Metal.
b. <Insert other nonporous joint substrate>.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.

Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

TP - 148

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile at [locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations> according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at [locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations> according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07 92 00

TP - 149

SECTION 07 92 19 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes exposed and concealed joint sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For exposed sealants, manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For exposed sealants, each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

TP - 150

A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.

1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 826 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical.
c. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. d. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. e. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.
f. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal Pro.
g. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
h. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber acoustical sealant.

TP - 151

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal 350.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

TP - 152

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07 92 19

TP - 153

DIVISION 08 OPENNINGS
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8 and as follows:

STEEL SHEET THICKNESSES
Gage (MSG)
Minimum Uncoated
Thickness
Inch Mils
20 0.032 32
18 0.042 42
16 0.053 53
14 0.067 67
12 0.093 93
10 0.123 123
7 0.167 167

1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

TP - 154

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C.

Samples for Verification:

1. For the following, prepare Samples approximately [12 by 12 inches] [8 by 10 inches] to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.
b. Door Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

TP - 155

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Apex Industries, Inc.

2. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.

3. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.

4. Daybar Industries, Ltd..

5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc..

6. DKS Steel Door & Frame System, Inc.

7. Gensteel Doors Inc.

8. Greensteel Industries, Ltd.

9. HMF Express, LLC.

10. Hollow Metal Inc.

11. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.

12. Mesker Door Inc.

13. MPI Group, LLC (The).

14. National Custom Hollow Metal Door & Frames.

15. North American Door Corp.

16. Premier Products, Inc.

17. Republic Doors and Frames.

18. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

19. Steward Steel Door & Frame Division.

20. Trillium Steel Doors Limited.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Frame Construction:

1. Face welded unless indicated otherwise.

2. Full profile welded for frames installed in high humidity spaces including rooms containing showers and water spray equipment.

3. Slip-on drywall for installation in existing drywall openings. Slip-on drywall frames will not be accepted in new construction.

TP - 156

4. Knocked down for installation in existing openings (not drywall). Knocked down frames will not be accepted in new construction.

2.03 FRAME ANCHORS A.

Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.

4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.04 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

TP - 157

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B.

Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: [Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches] [Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion].

3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with [inverted closures] [flush closures] [inverted closures, except provide flush closures at exterior doors] of same material as face sheets.

4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors[ where required for attachment of weather stripping] with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

TP - 158

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

TP - 159

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with [butted] [or] [mitered] hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware.

3.03 INSTALLATION

TP - 160

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

TP - 161

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch] [5/8 inch] plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13

TP - 162

SECTION 08 12 16 - ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Interior aluminum frames for doors installed in gypsum board partitions.

2. Interior aluminum frames for glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. B.

Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in aluminum frames.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum frames:

1. Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening condition.

2. Include details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

3. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware.

4. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, and accessories.

5. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

TP - 163

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of each type of aluminum frame and door in typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Advanced Architectural Frames.

2. Alpha Aluminum Products, Inc.

3. Dual Lock Partition Systems, Inc.; Avalon International Aluminum.

4. Frameworks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

5. Modulex Products, Inc.

6. RACO Interior Products, Inc.

7. Versatrac Frames; a division of American Door Products Inc.

8. Western Integrated Materials, Inc.

9. Wilson Partitions; a division of Arcadia, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain the following from single source from single manufacturer:

TP - 164

1. Door frames.

2. Glazing frames.

2.02 COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, with alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, and not less than 0.062 inch thick.

2.03 DOOR FRAMES
A. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.

B. Door Stops: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in, without exposed fasteners.

C. Casing Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in, without exposed fasteners.

1. Trim Style: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Frame, Trim, and Stop Finish: Clear-anodized aluminum.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals in black color.

F. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets in black.

2.04 GLAZING FRAMES
A. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for indicated glass thickness.

B. Glazing Stops: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in, without exposed fasteners.

C. Casing Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in, without exposed fasteners.

1. Trim Style: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Frame, Trim, and Stop Finish: Clear-anodized aluminum.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

TP - 165

E. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded rubber or plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated; in black.

F. Glass: As specified in the following:

1. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

B. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

2.06 FABRICATION
A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted and mitered connections.

B. Factory prepare aluminum door frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
C. Glazing Frames: Fabricate for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame.

1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.

D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.

2.07 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

TP - 166

B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size of indicated aluminum frame.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no piece less than 48 inches; components 120 inches or shorter shall be one piece.

1. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.

2. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members.

3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.

C. Glass: Install glass according to aluminum-frame manufacturer's written instructions and the following:

1. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
D. Door Hardware: Install according to aluminum-frame manufacturer's written instructions and the following:

1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections.

B. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended in writing by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.

C. Touch Up: Repair marred frame surfaces to blend inconspicuously with adjacent unrepaired surface as viewed by Architect. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

TP - 167

END OF SECTION 08 12 16

TP - 168

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Wood doors complying with WDMA Quality Standards:
a. Interior solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.

2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames.

3. Factory machining wood doors for hardware.

1.03 REFERENCES A.

Acronyms:

1. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association.

1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include the following:

1. Details of core and edge construction.

2. Details of louvers.

3. Details of trim for openings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

TP - 169

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.

4. Undercuts.

5. Requirements for veneer matching.

6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Plastic-laminate door faces.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.

3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.

4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.

1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Packaging Doors:

1. Plastic Laminate Doors: Package individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons; if in cardboard cartons, wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

TP - 170

1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inchin a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period: As follows from date of Substantial Completion:
a. WDMA Interior Solid-Core Doors with Plastic-Laminate Faces: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. Eggers Industries.

2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.

3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

4. Vancouver Door Company.

5. VT Industries, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with the following:

1. WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors" where WDMA doors specified.

2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

TP - 171

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire- protection rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

4. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors.
b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).

C. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
a. Screw-Holding Capability: As follows per WDMA T.M.-10 performance specified for each door type:
1) Extra Heavy Duty: 550 lbf.
2) Heavy Duty: 475 lbf.
3) Standard Duty: 400 lbf.

2.03 WDMA INTERIOR SOLID-CORE DOORS WITH PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACES A.

WDMA Aesthetic Grade: Premium.

B. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

TP - 172

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match products furnished under section 06 41 16 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets". D. Core: Either of the following:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1:
a. Grade for WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1) Grade LD-2 for Extra Heavy Duty Performance Grade.
2) Grade LD-2 for Heavy Duty Performance Grade.
3) Grade LD-1 for LD-2 for Standard Duty Performance Grade. b. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
c. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for the following:
1) Doors receiving exit devices.
2) Doors indicated to be Extra Heavy Duty Performance Grade.

2. Glued wood stave.

3. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. E.

Panel Construction:

1. Bonded Core: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before faces are applied. F. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extra Heavy Duty: At following locations:
a. Training rooms.
b. Toilets.
c. Janitor's closets.
d. Assembly spaces.
e. Exits.
f. Where indicated.

2.04 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

TP - 173

1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces.

2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.

2.05 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Light Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

1. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in the following section(s):
a. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

TP - 174

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

END OF SECTION 08 14 16

TP - 175

SECTION 08 56 53 - SECURITY WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Sliding, transaction security windows.

1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for security windows. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in adjacent construction. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Pack security windows in wood crates for shipment. Crate glazing separate from frames unless factory glazed.

B. Label security window packaging with drawing designation.

C. Store crated security windows on raised blocks to prevent moisture damage.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

TP - 176

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLIDING, TRANSACTION SECURITY WINDOWS
A. Provide horizontal-sliding, transaction security windows.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design Products or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Creative Industries, Inc.
b. Ready Access.
c. The Sliding Door Company, Inc.
d. Or equal.

2. Basis-of-Design Products: Sliding Window Types:
a. Type W3 (Dispatch Window): C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRL-490 Series Wall/Ceiling Sliding Door with Fixed Panel(s)

3. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Framing: Fabricate perimeter framing, mullions, and glazing stops from aluminum as follows:

1. Profile: Manufacturer's standard, with minimum face dimension indicated. a. Minimum Face Dimension: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Head and Jamb Framing: Designed for sealant gasket glazing.

D. Glazing Meeting Edges: Polished glazing.

E. Sill: Stainless-steel or aluminum channel frame designed for sealant gasket glazing.

F. Sliding Window Hardware: Provide roller track designed for overhead support of two- or four-wheel carriage supporting horizontal-sliding glazed panel. Provide manufacturer's standard pull and lock with two keys for each horizontal-sliding glazed panel.

1. Roller Stops: Basis-of-Design Product: CRL4942

2. Window Pull: Basis-of-Design Product: D639 - CRL Satin Anodized Extruded Aluminum for Showcase Finger Pull with 1" Lip
G. Glazing and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

TP - 177

H. Materials:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish.

2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate security windows to provide a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.

1. Provide units that are reglazable from the secure side without dismantling the nonsecure side of framing.

B. Framing: Miter or cope corners the full depth of framing; weld and dress smooth.

1. Fabricate framing with manufacturer's standard, internal opaque armoring in thicknesses required for security windows to comply with ballistics-resistance performance indicated.

C. Glazing Stops: Finish glazing stops to match security window framing.

1. Secure-Side (Exterior) Glazing Stops: Tamper resistant, not exposed to view .

2. Nonsecure-Side (Interior) Glazing Stops: Removable, coordinated with glazing indicated.

D. Metal Protection: Separate dissimilar metals to protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2.03 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.04 ALUMINUM FINISHES

TP - 178

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Concealed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A unless otherwise indicated.

B. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weather Stripping: Unless otherwise indicated, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weather stripping, such as molded EPDM, viynl, or neoprene gaskets.

C. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide material, size, and shape complying with requirements of glass manufacturers and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

1. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

2. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

3. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Type A Shore durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

4. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

D. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Stainless steel; hot-dip, zinc-coated steel or iron, complying with ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressures indicated.

E. Sealants: For sealants required within fabricated security windows, provide type recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating.

1. Color: As selected from Manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B. For glazing materials whose orientation is critical for performance, verify installation orientation.

TP - 179

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other security window anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.

1. Furnish framing anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing security windows to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for inserts, security fasteners, and other connectors.

1. Install an attached or integral flange to secure side of security windows extending over rough-in opening gap so that gap has same performance as security window.

B. Glazed Framing: Provide gasket-glazed framing. Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
C. Removable Glazing Stops and Trim: Fasten components with security fasteners.

D. Fasteners: Install security windows using fasteners recommended by manufacturer with head style appropriate for installation requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials. Provide stainless-steel fasteners in stainless-steel materials.

E. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for installing sealants, fillers, and gaskets.

1. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed unless otherwise indicated.

2. Seal frame perimeter with sealant unless otherwise indicated.

F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3.04 ADJUSTING

TP - 180

A. Adjust horizontal-sliding, transaction security windows to provide a tight fit at contact points for smooth operation and a secure enclosure.

B. Remove and replace defective work, including security windows that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation of security windows. Take care to avoid damaging the finish. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

1. Lubricate sliding security window hardware.

B. Provide temporary protection to ensure that security windows are without damage at time of Substantial Completion.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable security windows.

END OF SECTION 08 56 53

TP - 181

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors.

2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware.

2. Electromechanical door hardware. C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

3. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2. CBC - California Building Code.

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series.

2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

TP - 182

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.
c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

TP - 183

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the City has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. City must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Proof of Compliance: (California located Projects): Provide a list of product(s) containing chemicals known to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity as defined by the Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment (OEHHA) under Proposition 65 (CA Code of Regulations, Title 27, Section 27001). The list includes the specific chemical(s), if the chemical will be exposed to consumers, the means of warning, and an illustration of the label.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Certified Products: Where specified, p roducts must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD).

C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity.

Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and City concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

TP - 184

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

F. California Building Code: Provide hardware that complies with CBC Section 11B.

1. All openings as a part of an accessible route shall comply with CBC Section 11B404.

2. The clear opening width for a door shall be 32” minimum. For a swinging door it shall be measured between the face of the door and the stop, with the door open 90 degrees. There shall be no projections into it below 34” and 4” maximum projections into it between 34” and 80” above the finish floor or ground. Door closers and stops shall be permitted to be 78” minimum above the finish floor or ground. CBC Section 11B-404.2.3.

3. Operable hardware on accessible doors shall comply with CBC Section 11B309.4 and shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. Operable parts of such hardware shall be 34” minimum and 44” maximum above finish floor or ground. Where sliding doors are in the fully open position, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides.

4. The force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be in accordance with CBC Section 11B-404.2.9.
a. Interior hinged doors, sliding or folding doors, and exterior hinged doors: 5 pounds (22.2 N) maximum. Required fire doors: the minimum opening force allowable by the DSA authority, not to exceed 15 pounds (66.7N). These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position.
b. The force required for activating any operable parts, such as lever hardware, or disengaging other devices shall be 5 pounds (22.2N) maximum to comply with CBC Section 11B-309.4.
c. The 5 pound (22.2 N) maximum force shall be validated for the size of the door used. The Building Materials Listing of the California State Fire Marshal shall indicate that the door hardware meets the 5 pound (22.2 N) force and shall also list the largest door that can be used.

5. Door closing speed shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.8. Closers shall be adjusted so that the required time to move a door from an open position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. Spring hinges shall be adjusted so that the required time to move a door from an open position of 70 degrees to the closed position is 1.5 seconds minimum.

6. Floor stops shall not be located in the path of travel and 4” maximum from walls.

TP - 185

7. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.

G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the followi ng criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.

3. Requirements for key control storage and software.

4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.

5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.

5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
J. At completion of ins tallation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

TP - 186

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to City via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the City shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre -wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive City of other rights City may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the City.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

2. Faulty operation of the hardware.

3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.

2. Twenty five years for manual overhead door closer bodies.

TP - 187

3. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices.

4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware, unless noted otherwise.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for City's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements.

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, City, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

TP - 188

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all outswinging lockable doors.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA).
b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets with a 1-year warranty. Connectors plug directly to through- door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option.
b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.

2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. Manufacturer shall be based in the United States of America.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

TP - 189

1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU).

C. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types:

1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.

2. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.

3. Keyway: Match Existing Facility Cylinder Type and Keyway.

D. Removable Cores: If required provide removable cores as specified, core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.

E. Existing Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be keyed to existing system.

1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by City.

3. Existing System: Field verify and key cylinders to match City's existing system. F.

Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3).

G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to City's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the City.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.

1. Mortise locks to be certified Security Grade 1.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML2000 Series.

TP - 190

2.6 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed, subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below and in the hardware sets.

1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end- of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.

2. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML20900 Series.

2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.

4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.8 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers.

TP - 191

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.

Provide non-handed units standard.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC6000 Series.
b. Norton Rixson (NO) - 7500 Series.

2.9 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80.

Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

TP - 192

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).

2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or c oncave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide nonhanded design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF).
b. Rockwood (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where

TP - 193

indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F.

Manufacturers:

1. Pemko (PE).

2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

3. Zero (ZE).

2.12 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series.
b. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

2.13 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

TP - 194

2.14 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unles s specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

TP - 195

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.

3. Comply with aCBC Chapter 11B Accessibility; Mount operable door hardware minimum 34 and maximum 44 inches from finished floor.

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”.

Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating an d adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected.

1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

TP - 196

A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of City occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct City's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the City and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.

Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

1. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products.

2. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed.

Hardware Sets

Set: 1.0
Doors: 2
Description: Standby Storefront

3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Passage Latch ML2010 PSA M17 630 RU
1 Surface Closer Track Stop 7540ST 689 NO

TP - 197

1 Threshold Per Sill Detail

Notes: Gasket seals by Aluminum Storefront Door / Frame Division

Set: 2.0
Doors: 20, 4B
Description: Drivers / Supervisors

PE
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Passage Latch ML2010 PSA M17 630 RU
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop 430-RKW US26D RO
1 Threshold Per Sill Detail

Notes: Gasket seals by Aluminum Frame Division

Set: 3.0
Doors: 4A
Description: Para Transit

PE
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Passage Latch ML2010 PSA M17 630 RU
1 Concealed Overhead Stop 2-X36 630 RF
1 Threshold Per Sill Detail PE

Notes: Gasket seals by Aluminum Frame Division

Set: 4.0
Doors: 5A
Description: Interview

3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Entrance Lock ML2053 PSA M34 M17 630 RU
1 Cylinder Match Existing 626 RU

TP - 198

1 Wall Stop 430-RKW US26D RO
1 Threshold 151A or Per Detail PE
1 Door Bottom 434APKL

Notes: Gasket seals by Aluminum Frame Division

Set: 5.0
Doors: 5B, 7
Description: Office Access-Control (CR EL)
PE

2 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 QC8 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Fail Secure Elec Lock ML20906-SEC PSA M17 M92 630 RU 1 Cylinder Match Existing 626 RU
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop 430-RKW US26D RO
1 Threshold 151A or Per Detail PE
1 Gasketing S88D PE
1 Door Bottom 434APKL PE
1 ElectroLynx Harness (door) QC-C300 MK
1 ElectroLynx Harness (frame) QC-C1500P MK
1 Position Switch DPS-W-GR SU
1 Power Supply AQD2 SU
1 Card Reader HID wall mounted Furnished by Security Contractor HD

Notes: Access control reader to be furnished by Security Integrator

Set: 6.0
Doors: 3A, 3B
Description: Vest Access-Control Storefront Door (CR EL)

TP - 199

1 Threshold Per Sill Detail PE
1 ElectroLynx Harness (door) QC-C3**** (length / type as required) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness (frame) QC-C1500P MK
1 Position Switch DPS-M-GY SU
1 Power Supply AQD2 SU
1 Card Reader HID wall mounted Furnished by Security Contractor HD

Notes: Access control reader to be furnished by Security Integrator Gasket seals by Aluminum Storefront Door / Frame Division

END OF SECTION 087100

TP - 200

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Glass for the following:
a. Windows.
b. Doors.
c. Storefront framing.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

3. Monolithic Glass Units: See end of Section for detailed glass schedule. a. GL-1: Clear annealed float glass.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 12 16 "Aluminum Frames"

2. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts"

3. Section 08 56 23 "Security Windows"

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.04 COORDINATION

TP - 201

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.

1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.

1. Insulating glass.

2. Clear glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For the following:

1. Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For the following, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency:

1. Insulating glass.

2. Glazing sealants; provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

TP - 202

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods specified in the following:
a. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

TP - 203

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Glass Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in glass schedules or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

2. Pilkington North America Inc.

3. PPG Industries, Inc.

4. Saint-Gobain Corporation.

5. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions.

6. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Structural Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on Structural Drawings. c. Importance Factor: As indicated on Structural Drawings. d. Exposure Category: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center- of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short- side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

TP - 204

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.03 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling:

1. Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of one of the following:
a. SGCC.
b. Another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. c. Manufacturer.

2. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

TP - 205

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. E.

Strength:

1. Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.04 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS A.

General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Application Limitations: As indicated.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Application Limitations:
a. Not for use at expansion joints.

D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Application Limitations:

TP - 206

a. Not for use at expansion joints.

E. Glazing Sealant: Acid-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Application Limitations:
a. Interior exposure only.
b. Not for use at expansion joints.

2.06 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Glazing gaskets are specified under the following Section(s):

1. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts."

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.08 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

TP - 207

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Butt-Glazed Lite: Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Lites with Exposed Edges or Corners: Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

TP - 208

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.04 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

TP - 209

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.05 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

TP - 210

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.07 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type GL1: Clear annealed float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Safety glazing required. END OF SECTION 08
80 00

TP - 211

DIVISION 09 FINISHES
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions and soffits clad with the following:
a. Gypsum board.

2. Conventional and grid suspension systems for interior ceilings clad with the following:
a. Gypsum board. B.

Contractor's Discretion:

1. Steel Framing: Provide steel studs and track fabricated from conventional steel sheet or embossed, high strength steel sheet.

2. Partition Head of Wall Systems:
a. For non-fire-resistance-rated head of wall systems (at Partition Types A### and S###) provide slip-type head joints of any type indicated, except:
1) Where head of wall is exposed to view, provide slip-type head joints specified for exposed locations only.

3. For Metal Suspension Framing: Provide either of following:
a. Metal framing fabricated from conventional sheet steel. b. Metal framing fabricated from embossed, high strength sheet steel. c. Grid suspension system.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

TP - 212

A. Partition types are indicated on Drawings as:

1. Types A### for Acoustic rated partitions.

2. Types F### for Furred partitions.

B. Walls: In this Section the term "walls" is synonymous with the term "partition walls" or "partitions."
C. Composite Partition Assemblies: Clad continuously full height on both sides of stud framing.

D. Non-Composite Partition Assemblies: Clad full height on only one side of stud framing; or clad partial height on either side of stud framing.

E. Steel sheet thickness for metal framing specified in this Section is for uncoated conventional steel sheet. Where thickness is indicated by gage, comply with minimum thickness indicated in table below.

STEEL SHEET THICKNESSES
DW =
Drywall
ST =
Structural
Flat Steel
Sheet
Gage
Equivalent
for Dimpled
Steel Sheet
Gage
Uncoated
Thickness
Minimum
Thickness
Design
Thickness
Uncoated
Thickness
Inch Mils Inch Inch
25 0.018 18 0.0188 0.015
22 0.027 27 0.0283 -
20 DW 0.030 30 0.0312 0.025
20 ST 0.033 33 0.0346 0.028
18 0.043 43 0.0451 -
16 0.054 54 0.0566 -
14 0.068 68 0.0713 -
12 0.097 97 0.1017 -
10 0.118 118 0.1242 -
F. Tie wire and hanger wire diameters (uncoated) and corresponding U.S. steel wire gage are indicated in the table below:

WIRE DIAMETER
Minimum Steel Base
Metal (Uncoated)
Diameter
Minimum Steel Base
Metal (Uncoated)
Diameter
Gage Inch Gage Inch
20 0.0348 13 0.0915
19 0.0410 12 0.1055
18 0.0475 11 0.1205

TP - 213

17 0.0540 10 0.1350
16 0.0625 9 0.1483
14 0.0800 8 0.1620
G. Dry Exposures: A location not normally subjected to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of kitchens or locker rooms.

H. Damp Exposures: Locations protected from weather and not subject to saturation with water or other liquids but subject to moderate degrees of moisture. Examples of such locations include partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open balconies/porches, and like locations; and interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as rooms with tubs and pools, rooms open to damp and wet exposures, crawl spaces, and like locations.

I. Wet Exposures: Unprotected locations exposed to weather; locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as showers, vehicle washing areas; installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth; installations in direct contact with water or other liquids, such as pools, fountains, and like locations.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the following:

1. Image or description of label or other identifying mark applied to steel studs and track visually indicating metal thickness or gage.

2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Include framing manufacturer produced Limiting Wall Height table(s). Include letter signed by authorized representative of framing contractor certifying that steel thicknesses used in framing will comply with framing manufacturer's LWH tables for stud height or length, depth, lateral load, and deflection indicated for each partition type required Project.

B. Design Variation(s) for Suspended Ceilings: Where indicated, Contractor may propose variations in sizing and spacing of suspension hangers, carrying channels, and furring channels from those specified. For each area and variation proposed, submittal shall include the following:

1. Ceiling area for which variation is proposed.

2. All applicable tables from ASTM C754 annotated to indicate proposed variation(s).

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

TP - 214

A. Evaluation Reports: For the following from ICC-ES, an ANSI/CLASS ISO 17065 accredited agency, or other qualified agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Embossed, high strength steel studs and tracks.

2. Firestop tracks.

3. Power-actuated hanger fasteners.

4. Screw type hanger fasteners.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Framing members shall be certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

B. Structural Performance: of Partition Assemblies Select stud base-steel thickness based on following criteria:

1. Gypsum Board Clad Partitions:
a. Stud Depth and Spacing: As indicated on Drawings Partition Type Diagrams.
b. Horizontal Deflection: As indicated on Drawings Limiting Wall Height (LWH) Tables.
c. Horizontal Loading: 5 lbf/sq. ft.

2.02 FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: See Part 1 Article for Definitions of Dry, Damp, and Wet Exposures.

TP - 215

a. Framed Assemblies at Dry Exposures: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, G40 or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A653/A653M, G40, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Framed Assemblies at Damp and Wet Exposures: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, G60. Wet and damp exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Shower rooms and rooms containing water spray devices. 2) Toilet rooms and bathrooms with openings, including doorways, to shower rooms.
3) Locker rooms with openings, including doorways, to shower rooms.

2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS FOR PARTITIONS AND SOFFITS
A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks.

1. Conventional Steel Studs and Tracks:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) Custom Stud.
4) Jaimes Industries.
5) MarinoWARE.
6) MBA Building Supplies.
7) MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
8) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
9) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
10) Steel Construction Systems.
11) Telling Industries.
12) The Steel Network, Inc.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawing's Limiting Wall Height (LWH) Tables. Partition Type Drawings refer to LWH Table used for determining minimum base-steel thickness based on Limiting Wall Height of stud.
1) Exception: Minimum 0.033 inch thickness required for framing supporting wall mounted casework.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

TP - 216

2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally comparable to conventional ASTM C645 steel studs and tracks.:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) MarinoWARE.
4) MBA Building Supplies.
5) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
6) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
7) Steel Construction Systems.
8) Telling Industries.
9) The Steel Network, Inc.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural performance requirements specified under Part 2 Article "Performance Requirements" and as selected from thicknesses available from manufacturer's published LWH Tables.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide system capable of allowing partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure to prevent axial loading on partition.

1. Minimum Vertical Movement: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide one of the following:
a. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing for vertical movement indicated.
1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
b) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
c) Fire Trak Corp.
d) MarinoWARE.
e) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
f) Steel Construction Systems.
g) Super Stud Building Products Inc.

TP - 217

h) The Steel Network, Inc.
b. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
c. Double-Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2- inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction fit over inner track. d. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
b) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
c) MarinoWARE.
d) MBA Building Supplies.
e) Metal-Lite.
f) Perfect Wall, Inc.
g) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
h) Steel Construction Systems.
i) Telling Industries.
j) The Steel Network, Inc.

3. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. Only products reported under ICC-ES will be accepted.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) Fire Trak Corp.
4) MarinoWARE.
5) Metal-Lite.
6) Perfect Wall, Inc.
7) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
8) Steel Construction Systems. 9) The Steel Network, Inc.

TP - 218

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:
a. For Bracing: 0.018 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. b. For Blocking: 0.033 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
d. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
e. Steel Construction Systems.

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
d. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
e. Steel Construction Systems.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
b. Jaimes Industries.
c. MarinoWARE.
d. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.

TP - 219

e. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
f. Steel Construction Systems.

F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2.04 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: For securing hangers to structure. a. Type: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on following ICC-ES reports as appropriate for the substrate.
1) Torque-controlled, expansion anchor; ICC-ES AC01 Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements.

TP - 220

2) Torque-controlled, expansion anchor; ICC-ES AC193 Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements.
3) Torque-controlled, adhesive anchor; ICC-ES AC308 Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors Installed in Concrete Elements.
4) Adhesive anchor; ICC-ES AC58 Adhesive Anchors Installed in Masonry Elements.
b. Material:
1) For Interior Locations with Dry Exposure: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2) For Exterior and Interior Locations with Damp Exposures, and where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 3) For Exterior and Interior Locations with Wet Exposures: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M).
c. Adhesive Anchor Limitations: Adhesive anchors shall not be used to resist tension loads in fire-resistive rated assemblies unless approved for such use in evaluation report or approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: For securing hangers to structure. a. Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70 Power-actuated Fasteners Driven into Concrete, Steel and Masonry Elements.
b. Limit use to interior locations with Dry Exposure only.

C. Screw Fasteners: For securing hangers to Metal Decking (Not Concrete Filled). Self- tapping screw designed for use with sheet metal decking; fastener includes self-drilling point and self-tapping threaded shank below a washer-like collar, and above the collar a smooth, straight shank transitioning to a flattened portion with an hole for attaching ceiling suspension wire; manufactured from steel with corrosion resistant coating.

1. Only fasteners with a Evaluation Service Report from ICC-ES, Technical Evaluation Report from an ANSI/CLASS ISO 17065 accredited agency, or other agency approved by the AHJ will be accepted.

2. Use of screw shall be limited to weight not exceeding that which ceiling system's hanger wire supports, as allowed by manufacturer's Service or Technical Evaluation Report with respect to base metal thickness and minimum tensile strength of metal roof decking.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following:

TP - 221

a. Doc's Marketing Corp.; I-LAG Brand Eye Lag Screws, 175 SD or 750 SD (ICC ESR-3135).
b. Or Equal.

D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, in following size:

1. Not less than 0.1055 inch inch diameter. Provide greater diameter as required for conditions indicated per ASTM C754, Table 6. See Part 3 Article "Installing Ceiling Suspension Systems" for Design Variation options.

E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base- steel thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Do not exceed allowable spans indicated under Table 7 of ASTM C754. See Part 3 Article "Installing Ceiling Suspension Systems" for Design Variation options.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645.
a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.018 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
b. Depth: As follows unless indicated otherwise on Drawings:
1) For Spans Not Exceeding 5 ft.: 1-5/8 inches.
2) For Spans Not Exceeding 6 ft.: 2-1/2 inches.
3) For Spans Not Exceeding 8 ft.: 3-5/8 inches.

2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.015 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
b. Depth: As follows unless indicated otherwise on Drawings:
1) For Spans Not Exceeding 5 ft.: 1-5/8 inches.
2) For Spans Not Exceeding 6 ft.: 2-1/2 inches.
3) For Spans Not Exceeding 8 ft.: 3-5/8 inches.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.018 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
b. For spans not exceeding 4 ft..

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical unless hat shaped indicated on Drawings.

TP - 222

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

2.05 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

TP - 223

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.04 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. For partitions, comply with spacings indicated on Partition Types Drawings.

2. For framed assemblies other than partitions, but including soffits, comply with ASTM C754, Table 1 except as follows:
a. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. maximum.

C. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry or concrete walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

E. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

TP - 224

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. F. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. G. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Space furring members as indicated on Drawings.

2. Where insulation is shown nested in framing members, install full (uncut) width units vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members; at inside corners cut insulation to fit. Insulation is specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."

3. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

4. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner.

H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.05 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.

Installation Standard: ASTM C754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

TP - 225

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Contractor may submit Design Variation, at their discretion, allowed by ASTM C754, Tables 6 & 7 for each area and condition indicated.

2. Carrying Channels, Main Runners, and Main Grid Beams: 48 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Contractor may submit Design Variation, at their discretion, allowed by ASTM C754, Tables 6 & 7 for each area and condition indicated.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Contractor may submit Design Variation, at their discretion, allowed by ASTM C754, Tables 1 & 2 for each area and condition indicated.

C. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

D. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck except with approval of Architect.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. E. Fire- Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

F. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

TP - 226

G. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION 09 22 16

TP - 227

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Partition type are indicated on Drawings as:

1. Types A### for Acoustic rated partitions.

2. Types F### for Furred partitions.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

TP - 228

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.03 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corporation.

3. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

4. Lafarge North America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company.

6. PABCO Gypsum.

7. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific.

8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard, Regular Type: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawing's Partition Type sheets.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

TP - 229

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawing's Partition Type sheets.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: As indicated on Drawing's Partition Type sheets.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

4. Application: Painted walls and partitions in wet and humid spaces.

F. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability.

1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawing's Partition Type sheets.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim for Dry Spaces: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Any of the following:
a. Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
b. Rolled zinc.
c. Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

B. Interior Trim for Backing Panels and Wet or Humid Spaces: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Any of the following:

TP - 230

a. Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
b. Rolled zinc.

2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use the following:
a. Dry Spaces: Drying-type, all-purpose compound, except:
1) Use setting-type taping compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
2) Setting-type taping compound may be used at Contractor's discretion.
b. Wet or Humid Spaces: Setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use the following:
a. Dry Spaces: Drying-type, all-purpose compound, except setting-type, sandable topping may be used at Contractor's discretion. b. Wet or Humid Spaces: Setting-type sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use the following:
a. Dry Spaces: Drying-type, all-purpose compound, except setting-type, sandable topping may be used at Contractor's discretion. b. Wet or Humid Spaces: Setting-type sandable topping compound.

TP - 231

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use the following:
a. Dry Spaces: Either of following:
1) Drying-type, all-purpose compound, except setting-type, sandable topping compound may be used at Contractor's discretion. 2) High-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
b. Wet or Humid Spaces: Setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.06 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws comply with ASTM C 1002 for fastening panels to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick (20 ga. ST).

2. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

TP - 232

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.

Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.

Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.

Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for

TP - 233

locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Ceiling Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Ceiling surfaces receiving water-based texture materials].

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C.

Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

TP - 234

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods:
a. For acoustic rated partitions Types A### comply with acoustic performance test references indicated on Drawing's Partition Types sheet. b. For fire-resistive-rated partitions Types R### comply with fire-resistance test references indicated on Drawing's Partition Types sheet. c. For standard partition Types S### and furred partition Types F### fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws or fasten base layers with screws and fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.

3.04 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 (System XIII: Control (Expansion) Joints) and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at panel edges where edge is exposed to view.

3. L-Bead: Use at panel edges stopping short of another material or abutting another material, where edge is not exposed to view, and where panel face is exposed to view.

4. U-Bead: Use at panel edges receiving sealant, and where face of panel is not exposed to view.

3.05 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

TP - 235

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: At following locations:
a. Panels that are substrate for acoustical panels or tile.

3. Level 3: At following locations:
a. Panels that are substrates receiving medium- or heavy-textured finishes specified in this Section.
b. Panels that are substrate receiving heavily textured wallcoverings.

4. Level 4:
a. At following locations:
1) At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

5. Level 5:
a. At following locations:
1) At panel surfaces recieving smooth, gloss sheen paints and coatings. b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

TP - 236

END OF SECTION 09 29 00

TP - 237

SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings.

2. Concealed suspension systems.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6- inches- in size.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

TP - 238

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot . B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

TP - 239

A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations:

1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.03 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL

TP - 240

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.04 ACOUSTICAL TILES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type: Stone Wool panels

2. Pattern: G (smooth).

C. Color: White
D. LR: 0.85 (white) E. NRC: Not less than 0.75.

F. CAC: 20.

G. AC: 180.

H. Edge/Joint Detail: SL, SQ
I. Thickness: 5/8 inch .

J. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.

K. Fire Class: Class A.

TP - 241

2.05 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

D. Hanger Rods Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

2.06 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following;

1. CertainTeed Corp.

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

4. Fry Reglet Corporation.

5. Gordon, Inc.

6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

7. Rockfon
B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips and complying with seismic design requirements and the following:

TP - 242

1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
a. Type: Infinity Perimeter Trim
b. Surface: Smooth
c. Composition: Metal
d. Material: 6063-T5 Aluminum
e. Edges:Straight
f. Fire Class: Class A

2.07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

TP - 243

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.

Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3.

Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

TP - 244

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:

1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile.

2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.

1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 fastener and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.

2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

B. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

TP - 245

END OF SECTION 09 51 23

TP - 246

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Thermoplastic-rubber base.

2. Rubber molding accessories.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 5 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

TP - 247

A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.

3. Flexco.

4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.

5. Nora Systems, Inc.

6. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location: As indicated on Drawings. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

TP - 248

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Colors: As indicated on Drawings by manufacturer's designations.

2.02 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Mohawk Group

2. Roppe Corporation, USA.

3. Or comparable products by, but not limited to, the following:
a. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.

B. Description:

1. Carpet Edge for Glue-Down Applications. For transitions between carpet unfinished slab or deck provide one or more of the following products as required to fit transition profile and dimension conditions:
a. Roppe; #42 Custom Carpet Edging 3/16" Undercut.
b. Roppe #43 Custom Carpet Edging 1/4" Undercut.
c. Roppe; #38 Glue-Down Carpet Edge 1/4".
d. Roppe #40 Carpet Edge Guard 9/32".
e. Roppe; #39 Glue-Down Carpet Edge 5/16".

C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated and at all exposed edges of carpeting.

D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

TP - 249

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

TP - 250

F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 24 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 24 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09 65 13

TP - 251

SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Luxury vinyl tile - LVT.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Instlvtaller.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.

1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every [50] <Insert number> boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

TP - 252

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [70 deg F] <Insert temperature> or more than [95 deg F] <Insert temperature>, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [55 deg F] <Insert temperature> or more than [95 deg F] <Insert temperature>. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

TP - 253

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE - LVT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AB; American Biltrite; _.

2. Altro Group; _.

3. Amtico International Inc; _.

4. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; _.

5. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc; _.

6. Flexco, Inc; _.

7. Gerflor; _.

8. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; _.

9. Polyflor, Ltd; _.

10. Roppe Corporation, USA; _.

11. TOLI International; _.

12. Mohawk Group
B. Mohawk GroupBasis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. AB; American Biltrite.

2. Altro Group.

3. Amtico International Inc.

4. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

5. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.

6. Flexco, Inc.

7. Gerflor.

8. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.

9. Polyflor, Ltd.

10. Roppe Corporation, USA.

11. TOLI International.

C. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile.

2. Type: B, embossed surface. D. Thickness: 0.2" .

E. Size: 36 by 36 inches.

F. Seaming Method for Installation:

1. Seams butted.

TP - 254

G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS
H. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

I. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than [9] [10] <Insert number> pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

TP - 255

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor-emission rate of [3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.] <Insert rate> in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum [75] <Insert number> percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.03 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

TP - 256

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhered Tile: Adhere to flooring substrates to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Use a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate unless recommended otherwise by flooring manufacturer.

I. Free-Lay Tile: Place flooring at locations indicated with units securely interconnected and fully seated on substrate to form a smooth, level surface

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09 65 19

TP - 257

SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:

1. Modular carpet tile and accessories. B.

Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.
b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

TP - 258

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.

3. Type of subfloor.

4. Type of installation.

5. Pattern of installation.

6. Pattern type, location, and direction.

7. Pile direction.

8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.

9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.

10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required.

Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

TP - 259

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. or one full box, whichever is greater.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes acceptable to Architect.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Comply with CRI 104.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

TP - 260

2.01 CARPET TILE - CPT-1
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bentley Prince Street

2. Interface, Inc.

3. Mohawk Group

4. Milliken & Company

5. Shaw Contract Group

6. Or Approved Equal.

B. Color: Indicated on Drawings.

C. Pattern: Indicated on Drawings.

D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.

E. Fiber Type: Duracolor Premium Nylon.

F. Pile Characteristic: Tufted pile.

G. Density: 9321 oz./cu. yd..

H. Pile Thickness: 0.120 inches for finished carpet tile.

I. Stitches: 8.0 stitches per inch.

J. Gage: 1/12 inch.

K. Surface Pile Weight: 37 oz./sq. yd..

L. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard polyolefin backing.

M. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

N. Backing System: EcoFlext NXT.

O. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

P. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Sentry Soil Protection.

Q. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

R. Sustainable Design Requirements:

1. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.

2. Living Product Challenge: Petal Certified.

TP - 261

3. Declare Red List Free Certified.

4. Green Label Plus Certified.

5. Minimum recycled content: Pre-consumer: 57 percent; post-consumer: 1 percent.

S. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.

2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646.

3. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement.

4. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.

5. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E.

6. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.

7. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.

8. Flammability: Class 1 according to ASTM E 648.

2.02 Smoke Density: Less than 450 according to ASTM E 662.WALK OFF CARPET TILE - CPT-2
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bentley Prince Street

2. Interface, Inc.

3. Mohawk Group

4. Milliken & Company

5. Shaw Contract Group

6. Or Approved Equal.

B. Color: Indicated on Drawings.

C. Pattern: Indicated on Drawings.

D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.

E. Fiber Type: Duracolor Premium Nylon.

F. Pile Characteristic: Tufted pile.

G. Density: 9500 oz./cu. yd. (g/cu. cm).

H. Pile Thickness: 0.144 inches for finished carpet tile.

TP - 262

I. Stitches: 8.5 stitches per inch.

J. Gage: 5/32.

K. Surface Pile Weight: 38 oz./sq. yd..

L. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard polyolefin backing.

M. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

N. Backing System: EcoFlext NXT.

O. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

P. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Sentry Soil Protection.

Q. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

R. Sustainable Design Requirements:

1. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.

2. Living Product Challenge: Petal Certified.

3. Declare Red List Free Certified.

4. Green Label Plus Certified.

5. Minimum recycled content: Pre-consumer: 57 percent; post-consumer: 1 percent.

S. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.

2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) according to ASTM D 2646.

3. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement.

4. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.

5. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E.

7. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.

8. Flammability: Class 1 according to ASTM E 648.

9. Smoke Density: Less than 450 according to ASTM E 662

2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability

TP - 263

requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

B. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast- in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet
tile.

TP - 264

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. C.

Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

H. Install per manufacturer provided color-coded installation guide drawings. Full-size drawing to be provided by Manufacturer or Architect for reference.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 09 68 13

TP - 265

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates.

1. Concrete.
a. Non-traffic bearing surfaces.

2. Steel and iron.

3. Galvanized metal.

4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

5. Gypsum board.

B. See INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE at end of Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (Velvet-Like): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-Like): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin-Like): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

TP - 266

E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

TP - 267

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. Behr Process Corporation.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co.

3. Diamond Vogel Paints.

4. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.

5. Frazee Paint; Comex Group.

6. Glidden Professional.

7. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc.

8. Kwal Paint; Comex Group.

9. PPG Paints.

10. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc.

11. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

12. Valspar Corporation.

TP - 268

13. Vista Paint Corporation.

B. Products (As Scheduled): Subject to compliance with requirements provide products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule at end of this Section. Products are listed (with some exceptions) by MPI number and shall be selected from the "MPI Approved Products Lists" (see www.paintinfo.com/mpi/approved/Manufactory_index.shtml ).

Equivalent products not included in the "MPI Approved Products Lists" shall be submitted as substitution requests.

2.02 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Unless indicated otherwise, products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists," except if approved by a substitution request. B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. ASHRAE - Emissions Requirements: Field-applied paints and coatings that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the following:

1. ASHRAE - VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following and as indicated on Drawings: D. Colors: As indicated on Drawings Paint Schedule.

1. Five percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

TP - 269

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Bare Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and residual coatings, if any.

Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. Substrates Not Subject to Wetting by Condensation, Dampness, or Humidity:

SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning as required to achieve a clean surface.

2. Substrates Subject to Wetting by Condensation, Dampness, or Humidity: SSPC- SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 (Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel) for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

TP - 270

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Occupied Spaces: Paint the following work where exposed:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

TP - 271

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.05 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 3.1C:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Apply where Premium Grade system is indicated. c. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated. 1) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138.
2) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
3) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140.
4) Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. B. Steel Substrates.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1R/RR:
a. Prime Coat: One of following:
1) Alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76 for 5.1R.
2) Alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 for 5.1RR. 3) Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Apply where Premium Grade system is indicated. c. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138.

TP - 272

2) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
3) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140.
4) Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System MPI INT 5.1C/CC/Z:
a. Prime Coat: One of following:
1) Alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76 for 5.1C.
2) Alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 for 5.1CC. 3) Quick dry, for shop application, MPI #275 for 5.1Z.
4) Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Dry fall, latex, flat, MPI #118.
2) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #133.
3) Dry fall, latex (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #155.
4) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #131.
5) Dry fall, latex (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #226.
6) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #158.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.3M:
a. Prime Coat: One of following:
1) Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
2) Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Apply where Premium Grade system is indicated. c. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138.
2) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
3) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140.
4) Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

TP - 273

2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System MPI INT 5.3H:
a. Prime Coat: One of following:
1) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, matching topcoat. 2) Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #133.
2) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #131.
3) Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #158.

D. Aluminum Substrates (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated).

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.4F:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Apply where Premium Grade system is indicated. c. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138.
2) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
3) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140.
4) Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. E. Gypsum Board Substrates.

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Apply where Premium Grade system is indicated. c. Topcoat: One of following matching gloss level indicated:
1) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138.
2) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139.
3) Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140.
4) Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

TP - 274

END OF SECTION 09 91 23

TP - 275

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Corner guards.
a. Surface-mounted, stainless-steel corner guards.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire-rated walls and listings for door- protection items attached to fire-rated doors.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

TP - 276

A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.

3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products of each type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Stainless-Steel Corner Guards : Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.
b. American Floor Products Co., Inc.
c. Boston Retail Products.
d. Construction Specialties, Inc.
e. InPro Corporation.
f. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.
g. Nystrom Building Products.
h. Pawling Corporation.
i. WallGuard.com.

2. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch(18 ga.).
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

TP - 277

3. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches.

4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.

5. Mounting: Adhesive.

2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.04 FINISHES
A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

TP - 278

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 10 26 00

TP - 279

SECTION 10 51 26 - PLASTIC LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following units:

1. Plastic high density polyethylene (HDPE) locker bodies.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

2. ASTM D570-98(2010)e1 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

3. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

4. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

5. ASTM D1037 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials.

6. ASTM D1693 Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics.

7. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Plastic locker bodies.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. For the following:

TP - 280

a. Plastic locker bodies.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in lockers.

5. Show locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories.

6. Show locker numbering sequence.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: High density polyethylene (HDPE) for exposed surfaces in manufacturer full range of colors and textures, nominal 2 inches square minimum. D.

Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. High density polyethylene (HDPE) panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, and surface finish.

2. Exposed hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Full-size units of the following locker hardware items equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locker hinges.
b. Locker handles and latches.
c. Locker hooks.
d. Locker coat rods.

2. Two of each type of tool required to remove and install security fasteners.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by locker manufacturer.

TP - 281

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage lockers have been completed in installation areas. If lockers must be stored in other-than- installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are the same as those in final installation location, and comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg. F percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support lockers by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where lockers are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases for supporting lockers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lockers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.

TP - 282

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Columbia Lockers, a Div. of PCiSC (Columbia).

2. List Industries Inc.

3. Summit Lockers, Inc.

4. Royal Plastic Lockers.

5. ASI Storage Solutions.

B. Sole Source: The following shall be provided by the same manufacturer:

1. Plastic locker bodies.

2.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the following:

1. The U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

2. ICC A117.1.

3. 2010 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2.

2.03 PLASTIC LOCKER BODIES A.

Construction:

1. Style: Flush overly or Flush inset, three tier.

2. Provide units fully assembled in factory; knocked-down units will not be accepted. B. Locker Bodies:

1. Box: Fabricated from HDPE sheet with following thicknesses:
a. Side Panels: 3/8 inch thick.
b. Back Panel: 3/8 inch thick.

TP - 283

c. Top Panel: 3/8 inch thick.
d. Bottom Panel: 3/8 inch thick.

2. Doors: Fabricated from HDPE sheet, 1/2 inch thick.

3. End Panels: Fabricated from 1/2 inch thick HDPE sheet matching color and texture of HDPE doors. Applications include the following:
a. End of row units.

4. Shelves: Fabricated from HDPE sheet, 3/8 inch thick; fixed.

5. Corner and Filler Panels: Fabricated from 1/2 inch thick HDPE sheet matching color and texture of HDPE doors. C. HDPE Panel Color and Texture:

1. Panel Material Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from locker manufacturer's full range of solid colors and texture.

2. Concealed Panel Material: White, smooth or lightly textured.

2.04 MATERIALS
A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Sheet: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than thickness indicated, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material; complying with the following:

1. Material selected for uniform color, surface flatness, and even texture. Exposed surfaces which exhibit discolorations, pitting, roller marks, stains, telegraphing, or other imperfections on finished units will not be accepted.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

3. Water Absorption: Less than 0.09 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D570.

4. Tensile Strength: Not less than the following when tested in accordance with ASTM D638:
a. Tensile Modulus: 339,000 psi.
b. Tensile Strength at Yield: 4500 psi.
c. Tensile Strength at Break: 2030 psi.

TP - 284

5. Flexural Modulus: Not less than 235,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D790.

6. Screw Holding Strength: HDPE sheet shall withstand a direct pull force of not less than 1,100 lbs per fastener when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037.

7. Environmental Stress-Crack Resistance: Not greater than 15.0 HR when tested in accordance with ASTM D1693.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.05 HARDWARE
A. Fasteners: Provide tamper resistant (e.g. pin head torx), stainless steel fasteners specially designed to fasten hardware into plastic materials indicated (e.g. trilobular threads for screws). Through bolts where used shall be security type requiring special wrench.

1. Fully concealed fasteners need not be tamper resistant.

B. Locker Handles and Locking Latches:

1. Functional and Performance Requirements:
a. For use with padlock provided by others.
b. Door closes and latches without the need for manually raising the handle.

Doors can be pushed shut.
c. Latch mechanism shall withstand a sudden impact (90 degree swing slamming force).

2. Handle: Surface mounted. Provide ADA compliant handles at ADA compliant lockers.
a. Function: Handle shall move up and down in a vertical movement and require less than 5 lbs. of lifting force to operate in accordance with ADA requirements.
b. Materials: Either of following:
1) Injection molded HDPE or comparable plastic product, in color matching locker door.
2) Stainless steel with satin or brushed finish.

TP - 285

c. Hasp Bar: Integral with handle; 11 gage Type 304 stainless steel hasp bar designed and fabricated to align with the latching hasp bar when in the lower or closed position.

3. Latching Mechanism: Latch mechanism shall attach to entire length of the door, providing a continuous security latch.
a. Function: Lift control type requiring less than 5 lbs. of lifting force to operate in accordance with ADA requirements.
b. Latching is achieved using an activation bar and multiple slide bars made of HDPE or similar materials and an additional 11 gauge type 304 stainless steel hasp mounted to the locker body. Latch hasp shall protrude through door and align with lift handle hasp.

C. Locker Hinges:

1. Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty, continuous type hinge, installed full height of door.

D. Locker Hooks: Attach hooks with at least two tamper resistant fasteners.

1. Hook Style: Either of following:
a. Ball-pointed; aluminum or chrome finished steel, single or double prong as indicated.
b. Bent bar fabricated from 11 gage Type 304 stainless steel, single or double prong as indicated; edges smooth and polished.

2. For Lockers Not Receiving Coat Rods: Provide one double-prong ceiling hook.

3. For Lockers Receiving Coat Rods: Provide one single-prong wall hooks on back panel.

E. Locker Coat Rods: Minimum 3/4-inch diameter steel; chrome finished or nickel plated.

1. Provide coat rods where indicated on Drawings.

F. Exposed Metal Hardware Finishes: Polished or satin chrome unless otherwise indicated.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Number Plates: Nominal 1-1/2-inch high (round, oval, square, or rectangular), etched, embossed, or reverse engraved, aluminum plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch high. Identify lockers in sequence indicated on approved shop drawings. Fasten with tamper resistant fasteners.

TP - 286

2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. Accurately factory machine components for attachments.

Make joints tight and true. Ease edges of corners to nominal 1/16 inch radius.

1. Fabricate units using manufacturer's standard construction, with joints made with dados, rabbets, or mortise and tenon. Dado side panels to receive shelving.

2. Connect joints using fasteners or plastic welding methods as standard with manufacturer.

C. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as indicated on Drawings and where not indicated as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor.

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches above the floor.

D. Venting: Locate vent openings accurately. Fabricate to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Ease edges to eliminate sharp corners.

1. Lockers: Fabricate lockers to vent using either of following methods:
a. With space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 1/4 inch.
b. With six 5/16 inch dia. holes at top and bottom of door. c. With 4 nominal 1/4 inch wide by 6 inch long slots at top and bottom of door. E. Number Plates: Fasten number plates on each locker door, near top, centered.

F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

TP - 287

B. Verify that blocking is attached to walls that are to receive specified units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Condition lockers to average temperature conditions in installation areas before installation.

B. Before installing lockers, examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and complete work as required, including removal of packing.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims.

B. Connect groups of lockers together with manufacturer's standard tamper resistant fasteners, through predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit lockers accurately together to form flush, tight, hairline joints.

C. Install lockers without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings, providing unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

D. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.

E. Locker Anchorage: Fasten lockers through back, near top and bottom, and at bottom and ends, with tamper resistant screws suitable for substrate to which fastened and spaced not more than 36 inches o.c.

F. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. G. Install number plates after lockers are in place.

1. Attach number plate on each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two tamper resistant fasteners with finish matching number plate.

3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding.

Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

TP - 288

B. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction.

C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace lockers that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 10 51 26

TP - 289

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. B.

Related Requirements:

1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if applicable.

2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for each type of roller shade indicated.

TP - 290

E. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and

TP - 291

humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manual roller shade systems by MechoShade Systems, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Draper Inc.

2. Hunter Douglas Contract.

3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

4. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company.

5. OEM Shades Inc.

6. Shade Techniques, LLC.

B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal .
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount .

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller- shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.

TP - 292

a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive- end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: In location recommended by fabricator. Indicate location for each shade on submittal for Architect's review.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting integral channel in tube.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Shadebands:

1. Material Orientation on Shadeband: Railroaded.

2. Material: .
a. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1) Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2) Type: PVC-coated polyester.
3) Weave: Basketweave.
4) Roll Width: 98 inches.
5) Openness Factor: 3 percent.
6) Color: EuroTwill - 6459 Silver Dove.

3. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range. F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

TP - 293

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.03 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

TP - 294

3.02 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 12 24 13
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SEE MECHANICALDRAWINGS FOR SHEET SPECS

TP - 295

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes general electrical requirements for all Division 26 work.

B. It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system. Provide all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all electrical systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) under this Division.

C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and competent and experienced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman.

D. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. Where conflicting information occurs within the drawings and specifications or between the drawings and specifications, the more expensive alternative shall be used as a basis for bidding and construction.

E. Branch Circuit Wiring: Where the drawings identify circuit numbers for items requiring electrical power, but do not indicate the manner of the wiring between the item and its source, the manner of the wiring shall be devised by the contractor utilizing the following provisions:

1. Wire sizes:
a. Derate wiring for thermal restrictions imposed by the National Electrical Code.
b. If wire sizes are not otherwise indicated, wire sizes shall limit the voltage drop for circuits serving general purpose receptacles(180VA per strap) to less than 3%, based on the receptacle in the circuit that is farthest from the source being utilized with a load of 14 amps at 80% power factor. The following wire sizes and circuit lengths comply with this requirement:

TP - 296

1) #12 up to 90 feet
2) #10 up to 125 feet
3) #8 up to 190 feet
c. Wire sizes for other loads shall limit the voltage drop to less than 3% based on the load indicated on the panel schedule.

2. Multiwire circuits: Multiwire circuits shall not be used unless specifically indicated or noted on the drawings. Provide a dedicated neutral conductor for each single pole circuit breaker.

3. Do not combine wiring of different source panels in the same raceway system, unless the panels are interconnected with sub feed or through feed lugs with no intervening disconnecting means.

4. Outlet and junction boxes: Arrange wiring extensions from junction boxes to outlet boxes to restrict the number of wires in an outlet box as required by NEC Article 314.

5. Single tubular raceways extending into panels or switchboards shall not contain more than 20 wires.

1.3 CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES
A. The following codes and standards are referenced in the Division 26 specifications.

Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the latest referenced codes and standards of the following organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)

5. National Electrical Contractor’s Association (NECA)
B. Install the electrical systems based on the following:

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction.

IBC International Building Code as adopted and
amended by the Local Jurisdiction.

C. The referenced codes establish a minimum level of requirements. Where provision of the various codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govern. If any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to govern. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not contrary to same.

D. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.

1.4 COORDINATION

TP - 297

A. Coordination during the bidding and pricing aspects of the contract includes determining where the work of other Divisions relies on the work of this Division for electricity and including the electrical system to match the requirements.

B. Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work-around methods.

C. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner. Provide all wiring in accordance with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price.

D. Special attention is called to the following items. Coordinate all conflicts prior to installation:

1. Door swings such that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door.

2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.

3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.

4. Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction and precast construction.

5. At each switchboard, panelboard and motor control center location the Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and clearance requirements of code are met.

6. Review specifications for other Divisions of the work to determine where other Divisions are requiring electrical connections. Verify electrical provisions shown on contract drawings by examining shop drawing submittals of other Divisions prior to submission to the owner. Do not proceed with ordering of supporting electrical equipment, such as circuit breakers, until electrical characteristics are verified. Proceed with rough-in only after verification of shop drawings.

E. Digital format copies of bid drawings will be furnished to the successful bidder.

Augment bid documents with additional information to ensure coordination between trades. Provide digital format electrical systems drawings showing all ceiling devices, fixtures, raceways and cable tray locations and routing to mechanical contractor to be used for coordination drawings provided by mechanical contractor. Include dimensions and elevations of devices, fixtures, raceway and cable tray.

F. Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location.

The layout does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the

TP - 298

circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of the raceways.

Where routings of major raceways and telecommunication pathways are indicated on plan sheets, the routing information supplements the information on diagrams. If no routing information is shown, route the systems in a manner that will coordinate with new and existing infrastructure and the work of other trades.

G. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattage's shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract.

Provide overload elements to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Where connections to variable speed drives furnished under other sections of this specification are shown, obtain the drive input current and verify the indicated drive circuit is compatible. Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems.

H. Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes (less than 6'-6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough-in.

I. Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades.

J. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract.

1.6 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the work, the Contractor shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents promptly after written notice from the owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract.

The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.

1.7 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts.

Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals

TP - 299

and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for correction, revision and resubmittal. Provide submittals for each product proposed for the project. See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc.

B. Submit electronic copies in PDF format. Submittals shall show:

1. Indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency.

2. Highlight, underline or otherwise clearly identify adequate information to demonstrate materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents.

3. Review and check all material prior to submittal and stamp "Reviewed and Approved".

C. Shop drawings shall show:

1. Ratings of items and systems.

2. How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project.

3. System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point-to-point wiring connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding.

4. Riser diagrams showing vertical wiring between components.

5. Line diagrams and or logical/control schematics including interface to other systems as applicable. Provide point to point wiring diagrams, indicate terminal identification at item of equipment. Typical diagrams may be used when accompanied by wire schedules that are specific to each product.

6. Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface points and indicate method of connection.

7. List of all Division 23 equipment noting actual rating of equipment that will be installed. For discrepancies between the requirements of the proposed equipment and the equipment provisions indicated on the drawings, indicate the contractor's proposed no cost change to the electrical system to accommodate the submitted equipment.

D. Release of Drawing Data files

1. Contractor may request to utilize the project drawing data files for assistance in producing shop drawings. Request shall be made by signing owner/design team’s requested documentation for release of the data files.

E. The Contractor agrees:

1. Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders.

2. The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept.

3. Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor intends to use.

4. To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract documents.

5. To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal.

F. The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents.

TP - 300

Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

G. Submittals and shop drawings are required per the individual sections and the submittals schedule at the end of this Section.

1.8 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A. Request For Final Punchlist

1. To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to the Architect. stating; "The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items a. - j. in the Punchlist Procure paragraph in Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation."

2. Project Punchlist Procedure: Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work.
a. Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment. b. Insert word processed (typed) Panel Schedules in all new and existing panelboards with actual "as-built" circuit descriptions. c. Number all circuit breakers.
d. Obtain final electrical permit inspection. Include copies in O & M manual. e. Provide written warranty in O & M per the General Conditions of the Contract.
f. Furnish Record Drawings per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form.
g. Furnish O & M Manuals per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form.
h. Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form.
i. To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in this section and forward to Architect. Note: If inspectors have not signed form, a copy of signed-off permits will suffice.
j. Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the word "DONE", and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the list.

1.9 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. Provide O&M manuals for all equipment furnished under Division 26 - Electrical of the specifications. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Deliver final bound corrected copies as noted in Division 1 - General Requirements 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion Form.

TP - 301

B. The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets.

C. These O&M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. Present and arrange information in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc.

2. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawing(s) may be required for this purpose.

3. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate.

4. Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions.

5. Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency.

6. Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. Include the parts list and part diagram that was included with the product's packaging, note that a "catalog cut" will not meet this criterion.

7. Shop drawings.

8. Wiring diagrams.

9. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation.

10. A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer. Include name, company, address, phone, fax, e-mail address, and web site.

D. Furnish complete wiring diagrams for each system for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to indicate the exact field installation.

E. Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not exceeding 5" thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and communication systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post binding.

1.10 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
A. After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the O&M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the

TP - 302

Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified. When more than one training session is specified, the second session shall be 30 to 90 days after the first as agreed to by the Owner.

B. Include in each instruction session an overview of the system, presentation of information in maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings. Conduct tours of the building areas with explanations of maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures and adjustment locations.

C. Factory trained suppliers representatives shall provide instruction for lighting control/dimming.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record drawings shall be kept on: the contract drawings, shop drawings indicating field wiring, vendor diagrams indicating field wiring, and similar documents.

B. Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone.

1. Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the work as originally shown.

2. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub-outs.

3. Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as utilities are actually installed.

4. Include addenda items and revisions made during construction.

5. Erase conditions not constructed or "X-out" and annotate "not constructed" to clearly convey the actual "as constructed" condition.

6. Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

7. Where “typical” wiring diagrams were used during submittals the record drawings shall indicate exact point to point wiring with exact terminal number designations.

C. Transmit the record drawing set to the Architect at the completion of the work. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect.

D. Transfer the changes marked up on the record prints into AutoCAD drawing files at the completion of the work. The version of AutoCAD shall not be earlier than the most recent version available at the date the project bids were received. AutoCAD files shall

TP - 303

not include the stamp of the engineer of record. Provide two (2) sets of prints, one set of fixed line reproducible drawings and one set of AutoCAD drawing files on CD Rom.

Transmit drawings, AutoCAD drawing files and the record drawing mark-ups to the Architect. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these documents have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect.

1.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
A. Submit to the Architect, , a Division 26 Job Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested.

1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for Division 26 they shall have the following meanings:

Item Meaning
AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Boxes Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes.

Code All applicable codes currently enforced at project location.

Compression Compressed using a leveraged powered (hydraulic or equivalent) crimping tool.

Connection All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational.

Exterior Location Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane.

Fully Operational Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents.

Furnish Deliver to the jobsite
Install To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational.

Kcml Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM).

Mfr. Manufacturer.

NEC National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association, Publication #70.

NIC Not in Contract.

Noted Shown or specified in the contract documents.

Provide Furnish and install.

Required As required by code, AHJ, contract documents, or manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully operational.

Shown As indicated on the drawings or details. Wiring
Raceway, conductors and connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

TP - 304

A. All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector).

B. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified.

Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.

C. Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design.

D. All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing, displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century. Any interface to other new or existing materials, equipment or systems shall function properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and received.

2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. No Substitute:

Where a specified product is indicated "no substitute", it is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation or as specifically requested by the owner. To this end certain materials and systems no substitution will be allowed.

B. Prior to Bid Opening:

Acceptance of products other than those specified will be issued by addendum to the bid documents only after the following requirements are met and the proposed listed material is determined to meet or exceed the requirements:

1. Requests for listing to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested.

2. Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures.

3. Samples shall be submitted if requested.

4. Requests shall be received 10 days prior to bid opening.

5. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered.

C. After Award of Contract:

Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions:

1. The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded and the specified products can not be delivered to the project to meet the Owner's construction schedule.

2. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, acts of God.

TP - 305

3. The specified product is no longer manufactured.

4. There is compelling economic advantage to the Owner.

D. In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign, and updating of record drawings required to accommodate the required modifications.

2.3 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. All work shall be done in accordance with NECA construction standards.

B. Adhere to industry standards of care for safety, including:

1. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council.

3. ANSI/NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

4. American National Standards for Personnel Protection: Lockout/Tagout.

5. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures.

3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment.

B. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction.

3.3 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting.

Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools.

B. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.

TP - 306

3.4 PENETRATION OF BUILDING ELEMENTS A.

General:

1. Penetrations of building elements by electrical systems shall not compromise the performance and integrity of the building element (structural, fire, smoke, waterproof, etc.)
B. Fire and smoke rated elements:

1. Electrical penetrations of fire and smoke rated floor and wall assemblies shall maintain fire-resistance or smoke barrier rating of the assembly.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner, provide all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as required.

B. Contract Coordination: Investigate vendor equipment proposed for installation and address and integrate the following into the construction process:

1. Special equipment requirements identified in shop drawings or submittals.

2. Equipment requirements for distribution system performance, for example, an external disconnect switch or fused disconnect switch to provide compliance with a governing code, a short circuit current rating, or a listing.

C. Obtain rough-in requirements for equipment furnished under other divisions of this specification prior to roughing-in.

3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied.

1. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

TP - 307

2. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

3.8 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or Engineer. Provide all instruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel required to conduct the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

B. Contractor shall remove and replace covers of electrical equipment, and remove/replace ceiling tiles to permit engineer to observe equipment and wiring provided. For manholes: Furnish OSHA safety compliant equipment and personnel, including ventilation, safety harness, ladder and flashlight.

END OF SECTION

TP - 308

SECTION 26 05 10 - EXISTING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Same as in Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. Reference documents including record drawings and "as built’s of existing systems are included with the construction documents. The contractor shall assess the accuracy of these documents during pre-bid walk through and adjust his bid to accommodate discrepancies between the documents and actual conditions.

1.4 INDICATED EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. The electrical drawings show portions of the existing electrical systems which are to remain, be removed or be modified. The existing information is derived from record drawings and other data obtained from or with the permission of the owner. Where indicated, concealed systems are also derived from record drawings and the Engineer's best judgment of the configuration.

B. The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall judge the work required. Inspection shall include areas within and adjacent to the work of any discipline or trade performing work for the contract.

C. The complete extent of the existing systems could not be verified during creation of the construction documents. Unless the contractor's inspection of the existing system determines a greater amount, the contractor shall assume there is 20% more existing electrical systems than what is indicated on the contract drawings.

1.5 POWER OUTAGES
A. The facility will continue its normal operation during construction; the Contractor shall schedule electrical system(s) outages with the Owner. Contractor shall work closely with Owner to assure the Owner fully understands the extent of each outage. Owner maintains the right to limit the extent and length of any

TP - 309

given outage. Assume all outages to Electrical system(s) in Owner occupied areas will require premium time and that temporary electrical work may be required to limit the duration of outages.

B. Submit a written request for a power outage at least one week in advance identifying the areas and systems that will be affected, time and duration of the power outage. The Contractor shall receive written authorization to proceed with the outage and shall re-notify the Owner verbally at least one hour prior to the outage and also notify the Owner when the outage is completed.

C. Temporary generator(s) will be required for any work that takes the existing generator system out of service or off-line from any portion of the emergency power distribution. Temporary generation shall include automated controls and wiring to interface with the existing system.

D. Unscheduled Outages: In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to an electrical system(s) outage (or other system fault), the Contractor is responsible for immediately correcting the problem. Included (as examples) shall be any premium time required to stay on the job site until problem is corrected and air freight for parts not locally available. Any damage resulting from performance of work under this contract shall be repaired to assure continuing facility operation and integrity, at no increase in contract cost.

1.6 PREMIUM TIME
A. Premium time shall be included in the Base Bid for electrical system(s) outages and for other work as required by the schedule, as shown on the drawings and as noted in other Divisions of the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXISTING MATERIALS
A. All materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.

2.2 EXISTING MATERIALS TO BE REINSTALLED
A. Existing materials and equipment (except interior, undamaged raceways) that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus shall not be reinstalled as a part of the new systems unless specifically noted or authorized in writing by the Owner. Forward a copy of the authorization to the Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e., condition, installation, testing, etc.) shall apply as if the materials were new, furnished by the Contractor.

2.3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED

TP - 310

A. In coordination with the Architect, these materials shall be made available for their inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession.

Items selected for retention shall be turned over to the Owner. These items shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like kind and quantity.

B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which electrical work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of electrical work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental conditions have been corrected. Report deficiencies or detrimental conditions of existing electrical work which might be unsuitable to connect with or receive other work. Failure to so report shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of electrical work.

B. Field trace all existing circuitry affected by the project to determine:

1. Source of supply or information collection point within the project area

2. Load or termination within the project area

3. Load or termination outside the project area, but supplied from or connected to equipment within the project area

4. Loads supplied from and located outside of the project area, but have circuitry within the project area.

3.2 REMOVAL
A. All removal work required under this contract is not shown on the electrical drawings. Refer to work of other divisions for contract work that may affect existing electrical systems. Coordinate work between trades prior to bid.

B. Contractor shall remove all floor, wall or ceiling mounted outlet devices in the "Removal" or "Demolition Area" indicated on the drawing, even if the equipment/or device is not individually shown on the project drawings. Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be removed from wall and the remaining hole patched to match adjacent wall surfaces.

C. Unused raceways and wire shall be removed back to source if accessible, otherwise cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and fill with grout.

TP - 311

D. If Contractor questions whether a particular device is to be removed notify the Architect noting type and location of device. If so directed the Contractor shall maintain the existing device in service without any change in contract price.

E. Contractor shall divert all electrical demolition materials including, but not limited to copper and aluminum cabling, fixture ballasts and lamps, enclosures, raceways and bus ducts, to either a local recycling station or to the on-site recycling station as provided by the General Contractor or Owner.

3.3 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED
A. Maintain existing systems not identified for demolition. Maintaining existing systems includes relocating the systems to coordinate with work of this contract, when work of this contract cannot be done while the existing system is in its present location.

B. Any existing wiring serving devices to remain in service and which may be affected by work performed under this contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity. Contractor shall assume the risk of maintaining existing systems, except relocation of wiring of #2 AWG and above shall be considered an additional cost if not shown to be relocated. If such wiring is found the Contractor shall notify Architect Owner of wiring location, reason it must be removed and cost of relocation and receive the Owner's approval before proceeding with the work.

C. Examine drawings of all disciplines to determine where work of other trades will or is likely to require relocation of existing systems. Remove and relocate electrical equipment in the way of work of other trades. Exact relocation requirement of existing systems to remain to be based on detailed coordination with other trades. Contractor to provide proposed locations of relocated devices to Owner for approval prior to commencement of work. D.

Relocation of any system shall be permanent.

E. Re-route existing circuits that are affected as a result of this contract that serve devices to remain in service.

1. Power Circuits (Including removal or relocation of existing panelboards). a. Prior to demolition work trace out and identify each branch circuit and feeder circuit that serves loads in occupied areas. b. Provide temporary wiring, schedule outage and reconnect loads to temporary wiring.
c. Provide new wiring in new location.
d. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and connect loads to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring.
e. Outage for each circuit shall not be more than 20 minutes.

2. Signal and Communication Systems
a. Prior to demolition trace out and identify device and systems being served.

TP - 312

b. Provide temporary wiring to maintain operation of system throughout facility.
c. Schedule outage and connect to temporary wiring and test system. d. Provide new wiring on new location.
e. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and reconnect to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring.
f. Outage for each system shall not be more than 20 minutes.

3.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS UPGRADED
A. Provide new raceway support system for all existing raceways that are to be maintained in the project area in accordance with Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical.

3.5 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Provide temporary lighting, exit lighting, and fire notification in areas of construction that will have ongoing or intermittent public access. Temporary lighting shall comply with IES standards and other provisions of these specifications. Selected light fixtures must have battery backup to allow for egress at all times. Indicate path to nearest exit with exit signs. All temporary systems shall be removed after they are no longer in operation.

B. Removing, temporary installation, and reinstalling in ceilings of light fixtures, speakers, detectors, exit signs and other electrical equipment is not shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall investigate the ceiling demolition work and include appropriate temporary work in the bid. The sequence of work shall be (1) Remove and store fixtures, detectors and speakers along with removal of ceiling, (2) Provide temporary support for wired fixtures and devices to be reinstalled in new ceiling at approximately the same location. Use chains for lighting fixture support. (3) Clean and reinstall in the new or replaced ceilings.

Provide new lamps when so noted. Provide temporary relocation of exit signs to original location when exit is reactivated.

3.6 WORK OUTSIDE OF REMODEL AREAS
A. Provide new wiring systems in concealed ceiling spaces, unless the structure is open to the floor below.

B. For work outside of the project area assume that removal and replacement of ceiling tiles is required in all finished areas. Spaces above existing ceilings are highly congested.

C. Route wiring around obstructions and provide pull boxes per code. Carefully remove, store or temporarily hang and re-install in undamaged condition all electrical equipment, lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles where access to perform

TP - 313

work is required. Clean prior to re-installation. Provide new lamps when so noted.

END OF SECTION

TP - 314

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. Alpha Wire.

3. Belden Inc.

4. Encore Wire Corporation.

5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW-2, Type THHN-THWN, Type XHHW-2, Type UF, Type USE and Type SO.

D. Fire Rated Cable: Compliant with application.

1. Underwriter’s Laboratories Circuit Integrity Systems FHIT 120. Type RHW in compatible raceway (horizontal runs only).

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

TP - 315

2. Gardner Bender.

3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

4. Ideal Industries, Inc.

5. Ilsco ; a branch of Bardes Corporation.

6. NSi Industries LLC.

7. O -Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.

8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.

9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: UL listed, factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

C. For #14 through #10 AWG wire sizes, provide insulated spring wire connectors or insulated compression connectors.

D. For #8 AWG wire, use solderless pressure connectors with insulating sleeves.

E. For #6 AWG and through #2, optional use split bolt connectors with manufactured insulation covers or tape sufficient to provide 150% insulation level.

F. For #6 and larger: Compression connectors using compression dies designed for the exact connector being terminated. Provide insulting sleeves manufactured specifically for the connector being used. Mechanical termination integral to overcurrent protective devices are also acceptable.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. C omply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

TP - 316

A. Exposed Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in below grade concrete walls, below Slabson- Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeder and Branch Circuits exposed above roofing: XHHW-2.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

TP - 317

3.6 PENETRATIONS
A. Penetrate fire barriers, smoke barriers, vapor barriers, roofing materials and other rated architectural elements in a manner that preserves the rating of the architectural element.

B. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION

TP - 318

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

TP - 319

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solder less compressiontype wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Provide grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, as adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction. Detailed aspects of code requirements for grounding and bonding may not be indicated within the contract documents, however, all aspects of code compliance are the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for larger unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:

Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.4 LABELING

TP - 320

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."

3.5 TESTING
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the grounding electrode conductor to each grounding electrode.

3.7 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
A. As required by National Electric Code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage protect with rigid non-ferrous conduit as permitted by applicable code.

3.8 METHOD OF CONNECTIONS
A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding or copper compression set type connectors U.L. listed for grounding purposes. Grounding lugs, where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used.

3.9 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. In conduit runs requiring an expansion fitting, a bonding jumper shall be installed around the fitting to maintain continuous ground continuity. Jumper shall allow for maximum movement of the fitting.

3.10 GROUND CABLE CROSSING EXPANSION JOINTS

TP - 321

A. Ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures or paved areas shall be protected from damage by means of suitable approved devices or methods of installation which will provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement. Stranded or other approved flexible copper run or jumper shall be used across such separations.

3.11 GROUNDING FOR FEEDERS
A. Provide a grounding bushing with ground conductor sized in accordance with NEC table 250.122 to the grounding bus in the panelboard and switchboards.

END OF SECTION

TP - 322

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Aluminum slotted support systems.

3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

4. Conduit and cable support devices.

5. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

6. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

7. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.

8. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.
b. Clamps.
c. Hangers.
d. Sockets.
e. Eye nuts.
f. Fasteners.
g. Anchors.
h. Saddles.
i. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.

TP - 323

1. Hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Slotted support systems.

3. Equipment supports.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.

1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.

2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Ductwork, piping, fittings, and supports.

3. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

TP - 324

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches O.C. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel, 3.

Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches or 1-1/4 inches or 13/16 inches as needed.

4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4

5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.

7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded-aluminum channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches O.C. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

3. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy.

4. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches or 1-1/4 inches or 13/16 inches as needed.

5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

TP - 325

C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiberresin channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches or 1-1/4 inches or 13/16 inches.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products provided by channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as those for channels and angles.

5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.

Body shall be made of malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

TP - 326

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA 101

3. NECA 102.

4. NECA 105. 5. NECA 111.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire -rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading

TP - 327

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, or Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding:

Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Provide cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

TP - 328

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

TP - 329

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials B. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

C. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

D. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

E. FMC: Flexible metal conduit F. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

G. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

H. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

I. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

J. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

K. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

L. SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, cabinets, and handholes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details, and attachments to other work for the following:

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with work of other trades, using input from installers of items involved:

TP - 330

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Listing and Labeling: Products shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70 requirements.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.

2.2 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex Inc.

3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. Eaton

7. Maverick Tube Corporation.

8. O-Z/Gedney – Emerson

9. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

10. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Conduit

1. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Hot dipped zinc galvanized.

2. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

3. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

4. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

6. Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
a. Material: Match conduit material.
b. Type: Threaded, compression or split.

7. Joint Compound: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

1. Couplings: Setscrew or compression. Steel. May be constructed integral with tubing.

TP - 331

2. Indentor, Tap On, and Die Cast fittings are not acceptable.

D. Deflection/Expansion Fittings: Comply with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible internal or external bonding jumper.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. Carlon

5. CANTEX Inc.

6. CertainTeed Corp.

7. Condux International, Inc.

8. ElecSYS, Inc.

9. Electri-Flex Company.

10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

11. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

12. RACO; a Hubbell company.

13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC

1. Complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC- 80PVC.

2. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

Couplings may be constructed integral to raceway.

C. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. Fittings shall comply with UL 514B D. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

1. Sizes up to 1 inch maximum.

2. Transition adapters for interfacing with other systems.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

TP - 332

1. Eaton-Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.

3. Husky

4. Schneider Electric.

B. Construction:

1. Sheet metal: sized and shaped as indicated,

2. Indoors: NEMA 250, Type 1, hinged cover.

3. Outdoors and unheated spaces: NEMA 250 Type 3R, Flanged and gasketed cover.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish and color.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

2. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

3. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.6 BOXES, CABINETS, ENCLOSURES
A. Suitable and listed for the environment in which they are installed per UL 50 and NEMA 250.

1. Indoors: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoors: NEMA 250 Type 3R, Flanged and gasketed cover.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. Eaton.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. Pentair - Hoffman.

5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co; Adalet Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

TP - 333

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

C. Sheet Steel Gage (Any Direction)

1. Less than 24”: 14 USS gauge.

2. Greater than 24”: 12 USS gauge.

D. Outlet and Device Boxes

1. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

2. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, galvanized ferrous alloy for use with IMC and RMC, aluminum for use with ARC, Type FD.

3. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

4. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

5. Wall Device Box Dimensions: Minimum depth 2-1/8 inches. Gangable boxes are permitted.

6. Floor Boxes
a. Fully adjustable, Sheet Metal or Cast Metal
b. Barrier to isolate power and communication outlets
c. Coverplate: Flush with floor with free swinging hinged door to access outlets. Finish: Gray, Brown, or flanged with insert space to match floor finish

7. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

E. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Small Sheet: NEMA OS 1.

2. Cast-Metal: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum or galvanized cast iron with gasketed cover.

3. Access Cover as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Screw Cover:
1) Both cover dimensions less than 30 inches
2) In line pulls with one cover dimension less than 16 inches b. Either cover dimension greater than 30 inches: One or more hinged cover(s) with Latch.

F. Cabinets and Enclosures

1. Finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Access Door:
a. Hinged with key latch to match panelboards.
b. Three point latch when dual doors are in use or when hinged side exceeds 47 inches.
c. Gasketed

3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

4. Labeled with appropriate safety warnings

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

TP - 334

6. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

Removeable. Hardware and accessories suitable for supporting equipment.

7. Provisions for seismic anchoring and deflection per Section 260548 Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

8. Lugs for grounding conductor(s) bonded to enclosure.

9. Accessories:
a. Door Pocket for wiring diagram
b. Convenience Light and Receptacle
c. Environmental control system to support operating range of internal equipment. Filtered ventilation.
d. Terminal Blocks: Tin plated copper, 600Volt, individually removable, DIN rail mounted. For termination of all incoming and outgoing wiring. e. Wire Channels: Nylon or PVC. Arranged alongside of equipment and sized per wiring requirements.

2.7 PENETRATIONS
A. Sleeves and seals associated with penetrations shall preserve the fire, thermal, water, or other rating of the penetrated element. Refer to Division 7 for Penetration Firestopping products.

B. Wall Sleeves

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

3. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Compressive Seals:

1. Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Eaton/Crouse Hinds Link Seal.
b. Emerson/OZ Gedney

3. Sleeve or body casting: Cast iron, cast in place or core drill.

4. Sealing Elements EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

5. Pressure Plates: Glass Reinforced Nylon or PVC coated stainless steel

6. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: 316 type Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

7. Completed assembly suitable rated at 20 psig or 40 feet of head.

D. Raceway Seal Fittings

1. General

TP - 335

a. For use with GRC or IMC. Sealant fill, wire fill provisions and orientation to match application, location and containment requirement. b. Sealing system, may be removed for replacement of wire without affecting integrity of raceway system.
c. Sealant or sealing material furnished by fitting manufacturer to match application and be compatible with wire insulation type and thermal rating.

2. Foam Sealant: High expansion, two part urethane foam, 120 lb compressive strength and capable of withholding 22 feet of water head pressure. Complies with UL 94 fire rating HBF. American Polywater FST or equal.

3. Sealing Bushings: Slotted PVC coated steel discs; neoprene sealing ring; stainless steel socket head cap screws and washers. Custom holes drilled to accommodate cables. Stainless steel socket head screws. Hot dipped galvanized malleable or ductile iron locking collars. Seals against gas or fluid pressure of 50 psig. O-Z Gedney CSB series.

4. In Line Epoxy Cement Fill Fittings: For control of gasses and vapors, rated for 40% fill, liquid epoxy sealant, Emerson EY or EYAX series or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and “Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems” for hangers and supports.

D. Determine optimal raceway routes that result in coordination with all building systems.

Determine pull box quantities, sizes and locations.

3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC,.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, EMT.

3. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 4, or 3R B. Indoors

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT, IMC, GRC.

2. Exposed and Subject to Damage: GRC, IMC.
a. Raceway locations include the following, when below 8 feet above floor:
1) Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallethandling units.
2) Mechanical rooms.

TP - 336

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC, IMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1. C. In Slabs: Not permitted.

D. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp locations and wet locations.

E. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression or setscrew fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. Cast metal fittings are not acceptable

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

F. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways parallel or perpendicular to structural building lines. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except as follows:

1. In rooms without a dropped ceiling.

2. In non-public spaces such as mechanical, electrical, communication rooms.

3. Unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not route:

1. Parallel horizontal runs of raceways within 6 inches (150 mm) or directly above flues, steam, or hot-water piping.

2. Nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C)

3. Aluminum conduits or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Anchors and Supports:

1. Positively attach raceways, boxes, and enclosures to structure, do not attach to supports for mechanical or other non-electrical systems.

2. Support raceways within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

3. Set boxes, enclosures, and cabinets plumb.

E. Raceway Terminations:

TP - 337

1. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

2. Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

3. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

4. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

5. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures.

Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

6. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap, plug or compressive seal underground raceways designated as spare at point of below grade entry into building or at first pulling access point.

G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Only use in floors and slabs that are not-fire rated, or where manufacturer obtains approval of authority having jurisdiction by submitting appropriate documentation.

2. Run conduits, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot intervals. Crossovers of raceways shall not exceed minimum cover requirements.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1.5 inches of concrete cover in all directions. Tie to rebar at intervals which will preserve minimum cover and prevent flotation.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete.

5. Change from nonmetallic to metallic raceway before rising above floor.

H. Stub-ups:

1. Above Recessed Ceilings: Use a raceway bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

2. Through slab, comply with either:
a. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
b. Terminate conduit at threaded GRC coupling with top of coupling 1/8” below top of slab.

I. Outlet and Device Boxes:

1. Mount outlet boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install

TP - 338

wall outlet boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

2. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

3. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Do not compromise wall ratings for fire and sound separation.

4. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

5. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

6. Box construction and size to match device requirements. Where device is furnished under this or other Divisions of this specification obtain requirements prior to roughing in.

7. Set floor boxes level and adjust to match finished floor surface.

8. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior, wet, or cast in concrete locations.

J. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceways only where indicated.

2. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

3. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

K. Movement:

1. General
a. Select raceway elements to accommodate the expected movement. Set initial position of raceway movement element as appropriate to accommodate ultimate worst case movement.
b. Install raceway supports to allow for expansion movement. c. Provide bonding jumper for fittings without a continuous ground path.

2. Raceway thermal performance:
a. Install in each run of aboveground metallic raceway that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). b. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

3. Structural and Architectural Elements: Install expansion fittings or flexible raceways at all locations where raceways cross building or structure expansion joints. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation.

4. Where piston fittings are used provide slack conductor in adjacent pull boxes or equipment to alleviate stress on conductor terminations during expansion joint movement.

TP - 339

L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, transformers and motors.

3.4 SEALS
A. Select seals as appropriate for the element (i.e.: liquids, gasses, dust, and/or vapor) the seal is isolating.

B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions when installing sealants and seal fittings.

C. Location:

1. Seal fitting shall be accessible.

2. Locate seal fittings so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the element requiring isolation.

3. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish like that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

D. Transition to RMC or IMC where required by code or seal fitting application.

E. Seal the following points:

1. Where raceways pass from warm to cold locations:
a. Boundaries between heated and unheated spaces.

2. Raceway connections to continually wet environments such as sumps and wells.

3. To limit transmittance of hazardous liquids, gasses, dust, and/or vapors.

4. Where raceways 2” and larger rise from below grade to terminate at stand or slab mounted exterior utilization equipment.

3.5 PENETRATIONS
A. Penetrate fire barriers, smoke barriers, vapor barriers, acoustic barriers, waterproofing, roofing materials, floors, walls, foundations, and other rated architectural and structural elements and assemblies in a manner that preserves the integrity of the rating and the intended performance.

1. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 requirements for penetration firestopping.

2. Roof penetrations shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the roofing system supplier and shall not compromise the roofing warranty.

B. Penetration of below grade walls and slab on grade:

1. Comply with either of the following:
a. Cast raceways into wall or slab.
b. Provide sleeve and compression seal between sleeve and raceway. The compression seal manufacturer shall have documentation indicating that the sleeve is compatible with the seal.

2. Seal interior of raceways:

TP - 340

a. Seal Bushings: Utilize at all penetrations where other seals are not specified. Provide a pull box for sealing bushing(s) at point of entry when end use equipment is located away from wall or elevated above slab. b. Foam Sealant:
1) For phase conductor sizes #2 AWG and smaller.
2) For feeder (not service) phase conductor sizes larger than #2AWG, where no portion of the raceway entering the building or equipment travels below grade at a height that is above the point of entry or the point of raceway termination at the equipment.
3) Apply foam sealant at raceway entry point into first interior and exterior pull point.
4) Apply foam sealant at all raceways entering handholes and manholes.
c. Below slab raceways are not required to be sealed when the following conditions are met:
a) The raceway travels below slab from one interior building point to another, and the slab entrance and exit points are at same height.
b) The raceway horizontal travel distance is less than 20 feet or the raceway is less than 2” in diameter and the horizontal travel distance is less than 100 feet.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

TP - 341

SECTION 26 05 48 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

B. Refer to Product specification paragraphs of individual Division 26 Sections

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and siz es of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by any of the following:
1) an evaluation service member of ICC-ES 2)
California OSHPD
3) an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

2. Coordinate submittal information with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” and organize the submittals of that section and this section making it clear which products will be associated with systems requiring seismic restraint.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For support and anchoring of electrical products.

1. Engineer of Record: Professional Structural Engineer with appropriate seismic certification shall provide design calculations and details for seismic restraints complying with performance requirements and design criteria described herein and as establi shed by the authority having jurisdiction. Submit detailed designs of equipment support, anchoring and mounting with associated design calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
a. Submittal review by the Engineer of Record for Division 26 will not include a review of structural engineering.

TP - 342

b. Submit documentation as requested by the authority having jurisdiction to the authority having jurisdiction, obtain approval and comply with all review comments.

2. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7 requirements for non-structural components and submit the following items. Format shall be suitable for acceptance by the authority having jurisdiction.
a. Component seismic qualifications and special certifications. Refer to specification sections for additional requirements.
b. Design calculations accounting for seismic demand on non-structural components.
c. Details of component anchoring for each of the products in the Division 26 specification sections, unless exempted by ASCE 7. Details shall demonstrate attachment compatibility with building structure and equipment.
d. Details of component supports and seismic restraints for each of the products in the Division 26 specification sections, unless exempted by ASCE 7. Details shall demonstrate attachment compatibility with building structure and equipment.
e. Details allowing for seismic movement:
1) Flexible raceway, cabling, and busway connections to the top of switchgear, switchboards, and other floor mounted equipment which is anchored at its base as a free cantilever and/or supports restraining free cantilever movement.
2) Raceways, cabling, and busway transitioning across multiple floors or across expansion joints. Determine floor to floor movement from building structural engineer.
3) Service entrances to building where soil movement is expected between the building and soil supported systems.
4) Where raceways connect to components mounted on seismic isolation systems.

3. Seismic Restraint Details:
a. As appropriate to the product item, seismic restraints include anchors, supports, bracing, isolation or other means to force the product to withstand the seismic per formance criteria and to not adversely affect itself or other systems with the limits of movement established by the design. b. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. c. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

Cross reference seismic restraint and supporting elements to tabulated product data.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic restraint for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. Electrical components include:

TP - 343

1. Non-seismically restrained systems that may affect seismically restrained systems

2. Raceways

3. Busway

4. Control and monitoring panels

5. Generators.

6. Panelboards.

7. Switchboards.

8. Switchgear.

9. Transformers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical products in Divisions 26 and as reference by other Divisions to this Section; their associated product supports, attachments, anchors, braces, seismic restraints; and integrated assemblies thereof; shall be designed and constructed per the performance requirements specified herein.

B. Seismic Criteria:

1. Refer to the International Building Code(IBC) as adopted and amended by the local authority having jurisdiction the project site to determine seismic force criteria. Refer to ASCE 7 for seismic design requirements for nonstructural components.

2. Refer to the Structural Drawings for the earthquake design data required by IBC 1603.1.5 applicable to the project site and building.

3. Determine seismic criteria applicable to equipment at specific locations within the building, for example: ground floor versus roof top seismic acceleration.

C. Electrical products shall have an ASCE/SEI 7 Component Importance Factor, Ip, assigned as follows:

1. As specified in individual sections of the product specifications for special certifications per ASCE/SEI 7 paragraph 13.2.2.

2. An Ip of 1.5 is assigned to Emergency and Life Safety System products and connecting wire and raceway. Refer to drawings for emergency and life safety system components which include, but not limited to:
a. Fire Pump, Transfer Switch, Controller, and associated systems b. Generators and generator supporting systems
c. Transfer Switches, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and other active electrical equipment supporting loads per Articles 700 and 701 of the NEC.
d. Egress and Exit Lighting
e. Fire Alarm System Control and Notification Panels
f. Emergency Responder Radio rebroadcast
g. Smoke Control System

TP - 344

3. As a matter of economic investment. and not life safety, an Ip of 1.5 is assigned to the following products:
a. Switchgear and switchboards
b. Transformers rated above 40kVA
c. Uninterruptible power supplies rated above 10kVA

4. Unless building code requirements determine otherwise, the Component Importance Factor of electrical systems not defined above is 1.0.

D. Building Interface: Review building architectural, structural, and mechanical systems and design and construct non-compromising means of attachment and anchoring.

E. Seismic restraint products shall be approved for the application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis.

2.2 SPECIAL CERTIFICATIONS
A. Provide special certifications per ASCE/SEI 7 paragraph 13.2.2 for electrical products(components) with an Ip greater than 1.0 when located in Seismic Design Categories C through F. Testing shall be in accordance with the following:

1. ICC ES 156 Seismic Certification By Shake Table Testing of Non-Structural Components.

2. A current listing on the State of California’s OSHPD Special Seismic Certification Preapproval list with an SDS value adequate for the project site may be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

B. Product certifications may be made by certifying products to levels that exceed the Performance Requirements.

2.3 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A. Description: MFMA -4, shop- or field -fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessori es for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion- resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.4 RESTRAINT CABLES
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized- steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube, angle, or steel slotted-support-system sleeve clamped or bolted to hanger rod.

TP - 345

B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings or restraint cables.

C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.6 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled- in and stud- wedge or female- wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.7 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Anchor, support, and restrain electrical products in accordance with the delegated design details required by this specification section.

TP - 346

B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requir ements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in specification Division 3. B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods determined by the delegated design submittal of this specification section.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: Anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.

Heavyduty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to

TP - 347

equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

1. Flexible connection shall allow for worst case movement between the independently supported elements.

2. Initial positons of the flexible or sliding element shall be based on initial position of structure relevant to movement in any direction.

B. Sliding or compression/expansion raceway elements shall have adjacent pull boxes to allow for ingress or pay out of cable/wire associated with movement of the element.

END OF SECTION

TP - 348

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment identification nameplates.

2. Identification for conductors, cables AC and MC cables

3. Identification for raceways.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Receptacle Identification Labels

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29 CFR - Labor Chapter XVII Part 1910-145 "Occupational and Safety Health Standards" 1992.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1and IEEE C2..

TP - 349

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Note that equipment names and room numbers shown on the Contract Drawings may not be final names and numbers. Confirm all final naming prior to label manufacture.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

D. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

E. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A. Materials:

1. Engraved plastic laminate - three-layer laminated plastic with punched or drilled holes for screw mounting.

2. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed

3. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

4. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

5. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm)
B. Dimension

1. Nameplate minimum of 1 3/4" high by 5" wide.

2. Lettering height for panel or equipment identifier @ 1/4".

3. Lettering height for remaining lines @ 1/8" high with 1/8" spacing between lines.

4. Comply with ANSI 13.1.

TP - 350

2.2 CONDUCTOR, CABLE AND AC AND MC CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each conductor and cable size.

B. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.3 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, for minimum lettering size and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Color for Raceway Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate Voltage
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

TP - 351

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.5 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.

5. Color: Black.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

TP - 352

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:

A. Label and mark equipment per all applicable codes.

B. On each unit of equipment, install unique designation nameplate that is consistent with naming used in wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

C. In addition to equipment listed in Part 2 provide nameplates for:

1. Access doors for concealed electrical devices

2. Electrical cabinets, enclosures and terminal cabinets

3. Contactors

4. Monitoring and control panels and equipment D. Confirm all final naming prior to label manufacture.

E. Labeling Instructions:

1. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label with screw fasteners

3. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

4. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

3.3 CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less:

1. For conductors in pull and junction boxes use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

2. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having
jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.

TP - 353

4) Neutral: White
5) Equipment Ground: Green
6) Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1)
Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral: Gray
5) Equipment Ground: Green
6) Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

3. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach self adhesive label to conductors and list source.

B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3.4 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label.

1. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

2. Install minimum one label per enclosed room.

B. Junction Box Identification

1. Use permanent black felt tip marker following painting to indicate the circuit numbers in 1" (25mm) high letters contained within.

3.5 WORKING CLEARANCE IDENTIFICATION
A. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

3.6 POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

TP - 354

A. Mount drawings and operating procedures on the wall immediately adjacent to the main piece of equipment for which the instructions apply. If sufficient wall space is available, mount directly to one of the sheet metal panels of the equipment.

B. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

3.7 WARNING SIGNS
A. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:

Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Controls with external control power connections.

END OF SECTION

TP - 355

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. General-grade single straight-blade receptacles.

2. General-grade duplex straight-blade receptacles.

3. Receptacles with arc-fault and ground-fault protective devices.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Single straight-blade receptacles

2. Duplex straight-blade receptacles.

3. Duplex straight-blade receptacles with integral switching means.

4. Receptacles with GFCI device.

B. Samples:

1. One for each kind of single straight-blade receptacle and cover plate accessory specified, in each finish and color specified.

2. One for each kind of duplex straight-blade receptacle and cover plate accessory specified, in each finish and color specified.

3. One for each kind of duplex straight-blade receptacle with integral switching means and cover plate accessory specified, in each finish and color specified.

4. One for each kind of receptacle with GFCI device and cover plate accessory specified, in each finish and color specified. C. Field Quality-Control Submittals:

1. Field quality-control reports.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers' Instructions: Record copy of official installation instructions issued to Installer by manufacturer for the following:

1. Single straight-blade receptacles.

2. Duplex straight-blade receptacles.

3. Duplex straight-blade receptacles with integral switching means.

4. Receptacles with GFCI device. B. Sample warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL-GRADE SINGLE STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Single Straight-Blade Receptacle:

TP - 356

1. Regulatory Requirements:
a. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

2. General Characteristics:
a. Reference Standards: UL CCN RTRT and UL 498.

3. Options:
a. Device Color: White.
b. Configuration:
1) General-duty, NEMA 5-20R.
2) General-duty, smooth face, NEMA 5-20R.

4. Accessories:
a. Cover Plate: 0.060 inch thick, high-impact thermoplastic (nylon) with smooth finish and color matching wiring device; from same manufacturer as wiring device.
b. Securing Screws for Cover Plate: Metal with head color matching wallplate finish.

2.2 GENERAL-GRADE DUPLEX STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex Straight-Blade Receptacle:

2. General Characteristics:
a. Reference Standards: UL CCN RTRT and UL 498.

3. Options:
a. Device Color: White.
b. Configuration:
1) General-duty, NEMA 5-20R.
2) General-duty, smooth face, NEMA 5-20R.

4. Accessories:

TP - 357

a. Cover Plate: 0.060 inch thick, high-impact thermoplastic (nylon) with smooth finish and color matching wiring device; from same manufacturer as wiring device.
b. Securing Screws for Cover Plate: Metal with head color matching wallplate finish.

B. Isolated Ground Duplex Straight-Blade Receptacle:

2. General Characteristics:
a. Reference Standards: UL CCN RTRT and UL 498.

3. Options:
a. Device Color: White.
b. Configuration:
1) General-duty, NEMA 5-20R.
2) General-duty, smooth face, NEMA 5-20R.

2.3 RECEPTACLES WITH ARC-FAULT AND GROUND-FAULT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. General-Grade, Weather-Resistant, Tamper-Resistant Duplex Straight-Blade Receptacle with GFCI Device:

2. General Characteristics:
a. Reference Standards: UL CCN KCXS, UL 498, and UL 943.

3. Options:
a. Device Color: White.

TP - 358

b. Configuration: Heavy-duty, NEMA 5-20R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receptacles:

1. Verify that receptacles to be procured and installed for Owner-furnished equipment are compatible with mating attachment plugs on equipment.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Reference Standards:

1. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' instructions, comply with installation instructions in NECA NEIS 130.

2. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents, comply with mounting heights recommended in NECA NEIS 1.

3. Receptacle Orientation: Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents, orient receptacle to match configuration diagram in NEMA WD 6.

4. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements. C. Identification:

1. Identify cover or cover plate for device with panelboard identification and circuit number in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Insert and remove test plug to verify that device is securely mounted.

2. Verify polarity of hot and neutral pins.

3. Measure line voltage.

4. Measure percent voltage drop.

5. Measure grounding circuit continuity; impedance must be not greater than 2 ohms.

B. Nonconforming Work:

1. Device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

2. Remove and replace defective units and retest.

3.4 PROTECTION

TP - 359

A. Devices:

1. Schedule and sequence installation to minimize risk of contamination of wires and cables, devices, device boxes, outlet boxes, covers, and cover plates by plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other materials.

2. After installation, protect wires and cables, devices, device boxes, outlet boxes, covers, and cover plates from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 262726

TP - 360

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Receptacle switches.

4. Shunt trip switches.

5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

6. Molded-case switches.

7. Enclosures.

B. Provide all disconnects required by code for equipment furnished under this and other Divisions of these specifications unless disconnects are integral with equipment and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

TP - 361

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

TP - 362

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

TP - 363

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc

2. ABB

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Schneider Electric.

2.2 RATINGS
A. Voltage: Meet or exceed voltage of the circuit the switch or circuit breaker is applied to.

B. Current

1. Continuous current rating shall be either of the following:
a. As indicated on the drawings.
b. If not indicated, match or exceed the continuous current rating of the overcurrent protective device that protects the conductor providing incoming power to the switch or circuit breaker.

2. Short circuit withstand and interrupting ratings
a. Shall comply with either of the following:
1) If the available short circuit current at the switch or circuit breaker is indicated on the drawings, exceed the indicated value while allowing for appropriate X/R derating.
2) Meet or exceed the AIC rating of the overcurrent protective device that protects the conductor providing incoming power to the switch or circuit breaker.
b. Compliance: Short circuit withstand and interrupting ratings shall be complied with using any of the following methods:
1) Listed short circuit ratings complying with above criteria. 2) Independent testing laboratory recognized series connected ratings complying with the above criteria.
3) Oversizing the indicated switch or circuit breaker rated current to obtain a listed short circuit withstand and interrupting rating complying with the above criteria, if the appropriate amount of space is available at the indicated location.
4) If a nonfusible disconnect is indicated it may be changed to a fusible disconnect to obtain the required listed short circuit current withstand rating.

3. Overcurrent Protection
a. Provide overcurrent protection matching the ampacity indicated on the drawings.
b. When included as part of the disconnecting means for utilization equipment the overcurrent protection shall comply with the listing requirements of the utilization equipment. Obtain utilization equipment shop drawings as specified in the appropriate specification division to determine requirements.

C. Poles: Match the circuit the switch or circuit breaker is applied to.

TP - 364

2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 100 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, Larger than 100 amp: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

2.4 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 100 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, Larger than 100 amp. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

2.5 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES
A. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully inserted into the receptacle.

D. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure ground lug).

2.6 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TP - 365

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

C. Molded Case Switch: When serving only as a disconnecting means.

D. Frame sizes 400 amp and larger: Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Lugs: Mechanical or compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

B. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

C. Neutral Kit: Required where neutral conductor is indicated on the drawings. Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

D. Additional accessories, where indicated

1. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

2. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.

4. Alarm Switch: One SPDT contact that operates only when switch has tripped.

2.8 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Kitchen, Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

TP - 366

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

2.9 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems.

B. Provide permanently attached nameplates (with mechanical fasteners) constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through black surface material to white sublayer. Exception: Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red background.

C. Include the following information: Load name, voltage and phase and fuse size and type (when applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Securely mount adjacent to equipment on wall or acceptable mounting frame.

Disconnect switches shall be mounted independent from the equipment they serve.

Disconnects supported only by raceway are not acceptable.

C. Wiring space within Disconnects, Fused Switches or Enclosed Circuit Breakers shall not be used for splices.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install fuses in fusible devices.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

TP - 367

3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

TP - 368

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as directed.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 27 COMUNICATIONS

SEE TELECOM DRAWINGS FOR SHEET SPECS

Appendix
A

Form CD-1 Waste Management and Recycling Plan

BLD-2600 Rev. 4/8/19

Form CD-1: Waste Management and Recycling Plan
The City of Gardena (City) requires all construction and demolition permit applicants to prepare a waste management and recycling plan in accordance with Ordinance Number 1649 (Municipal Code Chapter 8.20).

By completing this form, you are complying with the plan requirement to estimate project disposal tonnage, and identify job site practices for collection and disposition of wastes. If your project is exempt, please complete a separate Form CD-1a. If you have questions, please contact the Department of Community Development for assistance at (310) 217 -9530. The completed plan is to be submitted to the City at the time your building permit application is submitted. The diversion deposit and administrative fee i s paid directly to the Building & Safety Division. Be sure to retain your copy of this plan and the payment receipt for reimbursement. Please note that no hauler, other than WRG, may be used to transport debris and waste to disposal. Contractors are required to prepare and submit a C&D Waste Diversion Report within 60 days of completion of the project to the City for review and approval.

Job Site Address
Applicant’s Name Title
Company Telephone No.

Company Address
Fax No. Email Address
Type of Project: □ New Construction □ Demolition □ Renovation Type of Building: □ Commercial/Industrial □ Single Family Residence □ Multi-Family Residence

How will waste be handled during your project? (Please check all that apply)  Job site separation. Material will be segregated into two or more material -specific bins. For example, one bin for concrete, one bin for metals, one bin for wood, one bin for trash, etc.  Collection and delivery of mixed loads to a materials recovery facility. Clean construction and demolition material is commingled into a bin. The mixed loads are then delivered to a materials recovery facility for sorting. Trash should be collected in a separate bin and delivered to a landfill.  Green Building. The applicant is planning to construct its project using “green building” methods to reduce waste, use recycled content materials, incorporate energy conservation, and plan for deconstruction.
 WRG. The applicant will contact WRG at (310) 366-7600 to use WRG as hauler. WRG is the City of Gardena’s only authorized hauler. Failure to use WRG will result in denial of deposit refund.

How much waste do you expect to generate for disposal through your project? (Specify) ____ __ tons.

BLD-2600 Rev. 4/8/19

Unless categorically exempt, each applicant who applies for a building and/or demolition permit shall post a deposit in an amount based on square footage of the project, but not less than $5,000.

Project Value Deposit Paid
Project Sq. Footage Project Acres

I hereby certify that the information submitted is true and accurate Signature

Date

Office Use Only
□ Exempt □ Approved, Building Permit No.

Received by Date

Page 1 ends

Gardena City CouncilNovember 8, 2022

Gardena City Council
November 8, 2022